Samsung Tablet SGH I497ZSAATT User Guide

A N D R O I D  
T A B L E T  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
device and keep it for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS  
OR BENEFITS.  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,  
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.  
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own  
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field  
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the  
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as  
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network  
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more  
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe  
.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE  
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND  
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™  
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO  
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other  
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,  
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole  
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security  
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited  
warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™  
devices are sold. [101212]  
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC  
Headquarters:  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, TX 75082  
Customer Care Center:  
1000 Klein Rd.  
Plano, TX 75074  
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
Internet Address:  
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device?  
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:  
Nuance®, VSuite, T9® Text Input, XT9® Smart Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance  
Communications, Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are  
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSDTM, microSDHCTM, and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Calendar, Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google  
Play Books, Google Play Music, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
Peel and the Peel logo are marks owned by Peel Technologies, Inc. and may be registered.  
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make  
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. Some devices or  
plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.  
Your tablet is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be  
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your tablet being shared. For applications available  
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your tablet and other  
phones on your account.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
®
, DivX , DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under  
TM  
license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX  
videos.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-  
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (Apps  
About device Legal information License settings DivX® VOD Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to  
complete your registration.  
>
Settings  
>
>
>
>
>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10: Health and Safety  
Information ............................................206  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
Restricting Children's Access to  
Your Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
Section 12: Samsung Product  
Registration ..........................................238  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section helps you to quickly start using your device.  
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual  
Understanding This User Manual  
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of  
your device. A robust index for features begins on page 239.  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual  
displays may vary depending on the software version of  
your device and any changes to the device’s settings.  
Also included is important safety information, beginning on  
page 206, that you should know before using your device.  
This manual gives navigation instructions according to the  
default display settings. If you select other settings,  
navigation steps may be different.  
Special Text  
In this manual, some text is set apart from the rest. This  
special text is intended to point out important information,  
share quick methods for activating features, define terms,  
and more. The definitions for these methods are as follows:  
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual  
assume that you are starting from a Home screen. To get to a  
Home screen, you may need to unlock the device. For more  
Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu,  
or sub-menu.  
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings  
and may vary from your device depending on the  
software version on your device and any changes to the  
device’s settings.  
Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts.  
Important: Points out important information about the current  
feature that could affect performance.  
Warning: Brings important information to your attention that can  
help to prevent loss of data or functionality or damage to your  
device.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
   
Text Conventions  
Battery Indicator  
This manual provides condensed information about how to  
use your device. To make this possible, the following text  
conventions are used to represent often-used steps:  
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting  
successiveoptionsinlonger,orrepetitive,procedures.For  
example:  
The Battery icon  
in the Status Bar shows the battery  
power level. When battery power is 15% or less, your device  
prompts you to charge the battery. If you continue to operate  
the device without charging, the device powers off. For  
Tip: Touch the Time field to display battery charge status.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Display Screen timeout.  
Apps  
Settings  
Charging the Battery  
Your device comes with a Wall/USB Charger (Outlet  
Connector, Charging Head, and USB cable) to charge your  
device from any standard AC power outlet.  
Battery  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable, standard Li-Ion  
battery. A Wall/USB Charger (Charging Head and USB cable)  
are included with the device for charging the battery.  
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully  
charge the battery before using your device for the first  
time.  
Warning! Use only approved charging devices. Approved  
accessories are designed to maximize battery life.  
Using other accessories may invalidate your  
warranty and may cause damage.  
After the first charge, you can use the device while  
charging.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Insert the USB cable into the Charging Head (1).  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Charging  
3. Plug the Charging Head into a standard AC power  
outlet.  
Head  
2. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/  
4. When charging is complete, unplug the Charging Head  
from the power outlet and remove the USB cable from  
the device.  
Accessory Port (2).  
Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen  
does not function due to an unstable power supply,  
unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet  
or unplug the USB cable from the device.  
Note: You cannot charge the battery using the USB cable and  
your PC.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Note: If the battery is completely discharged, you cannot turn  
on the device, even with the USB power adapter  
connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few  
minutes before you try to turn on the device.  
Caution! Make sure that the SIM card’s gold contacts face  
downward and that the notched corner of the card  
goes in first.  
Installing the SIM Card  
Correct  
Incorrect  
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided  
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,  
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many  
others features.  
Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts  
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,  
so be careful when handling, inserting, or  
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach  
of small children.  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the device will not  
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot  
if the SIM is not detected.  
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket (1)  
until the card locks into place (2). The illustration  
shows the screen facing up.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning Your Device On and Off  
Setting Up Your Device  
When you first turn on your device, you are asked to set up a  
few things. To do that, the following screens display. Some  
screens can be skipped (touch Skip) or re-displayed (touch  
Back). Some screens display depending on the options you  
choose.  
Turning Your Device On  
Press and hold the Power/Lock Key  
.
Welcome  
Note: Your device’s internal  
antenna is located along the  
top back of the device. Do not  
block the antenna; doing so  
may affect signal quality and  
may cause the device to  
1. Touch the language field, scroll through the list, and  
touch the language you want your device to use, such  
as, English (United States).  
2. Touch Start  
.
SIM Card Not Found  
operate at a higher power level  
than is necessary. For more  
The SIM card not found screen displays if you have not  
installed the SIM card that was provided with your tablet.  
Ensure that you have an activated SIM card installed in your  
device prior to device set-up. For more information, refer to  
Turning Your Device Off  
1. Press and hold the Power/Lock Key  
2. At the Device options prompt, touch Power off  
.
Touch Skip to operate your tablet without the SIM card.  
.
3. At the Power off prompt, touch OK  
.
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
     
Wi-Fi  
Make it Google  
Make sure the Wi-Fi OFF / ON icon is set to ON  
choose one of the following options:  
and  
Your new device uses your Google account to fully use its  
Android features, including Gmail, Maps, Navigation, Google  
Talk, and Google PlayTM  
.
Touch Add Wi-Fi network to enter a Network SSID that is  
not listed.  
The Make it Google screen allows you to create a new  
Google account or sign in, if you already have a Google  
account.  
Touch Scan to make sure you have an accurate list of  
Wi-Fi networks.  
Note: If you skipped Wi-Fi setup, the Wi-Fi setup screen  
Touch one of the Wi-Fi networks in the list, enter the  
password, and touch Connect. Touch and connect to  
another Wi-Fi network or touch Next to continue.  
displays and you must connect through a Wi-Fi network.  
Touch Sign in and then enter the email address and  
password of your existing account.  
– or –  
Touch Skip to perform this task later. For more  
Set Date and Time  
1. Touch the time zone field (GMT+00:00) and select the  
Touch Get an account or enter the email address and  
password of your existing account.  
– or –  
correct time zone.  
2. Under Date, set the date (month, day, year), if  
necessary.  
Touch Not now to perform this task later. For more  
3. Under Time, set the time (hour, minute, and AM or PM),  
if necessary.  
4. Touch Next  
.
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enable Purchases  
This Tablet Belongs To ...  
This screen displays if you signed in to your Google account.  
To personalize the tablet with your name:  
1. Touch the First and Last fields and use the on-screen  
keyboard to enter you first and last name.  
Enter purchase information for your Google Play  
account and touch Save  
.
2. Touch Next  
.
– or –  
Google Services  
Touch Skip  
.
This screen displays if you did not sign in to your Google  
account. The use of this device is subject to the privacy  
policy and other terms.  
1. Touch Learn more to read the privacy policy and other  
terms.  
Backup and Restore  
This screen also displays if you signed in to your Google  
account.  
1. Read the backup and restore information.  
2. Enable either or both options.  
2. Touch Next, if you agree that your device may receive  
and install updates from Google.  
3. Touch Next  
.
The Restoring screen displays while your information is  
being restored.  
Setup Complete  
Congratulations! Your device is set up and ready to use.  
Use Google Location  
Touch Finish  
.
1. Read the information on the screen and enable either  
or both of the Google location services.  
2. Touch Next to continue.  
The main Home screen displays.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
2. Once the URL loads, click on the Can’t access your  
Creating a New Google Account  
account? link and follow the on-screen instructions.  
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will  
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your  
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will  
always be in sync between your tablet and computer.  
Using Google Maps  
In order to use some applications related to Google Maps,  
you must first connect Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to  
If you did not create a new account during the setup  
procedure when you first turned your tablet on, follow these  
steps:  
You must also enable location services to use Google Maps.  
Some features require Standalone or Google location  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
Task Manager  
Your device can run applications simultaneously and some  
applications run in the background.  
2. Touch New to create a new Google account.  
Use Task Manager to see which applications are running on  
your device and to end running applications to extend battery  
life. You can also uninstall applications from your device and  
see how much memory is used by applications.  
Retrieving Your Google Account  
Password  
A Google account password is required for Google  
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account  
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:  
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser to  
navigate to http://google.com/accounts  
.
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Task Manager Pop-Up  
The Task manager pop-up provides information about Active  
applications and includes a RAM manager. It also has a link to  
the Task Manager application.  
Task Manager Application  
The Task Manager application provides information about  
applications, including Active applications  
manager Storage, and Help  
To access the Task Manager:  
,
Downloaded, RAM  
,
.
To access the Task manager pop-up:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Mini App Tray  
1. Access Task Manager from the Task manager pop-up.  
Task manager  
.
– or –  
– or –  
From any screen, touch and hold  
The Task manager pop-up displays.  
Home.  
Add the Application monitor widget to a Home screen  
and then touch Application monitor on the Application  
2. Touch the Active applications tab to view applications  
running on your device. Touch to end an  
application or End all to stop all running applications.  
3. Touch the RAM manager tab to display the amount of  
Random Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch  
Clear memory to clear inactive and background  
processes.  
– or –  
Touch  
Navigation and then touch Task manager.  
2. Touch Active applications to view applications running  
on your device. Touch End to end an application or  
End all to end all running applications.  
4. Touch  
in the top right corner of the Task manager  
pop-up to close the application.  
5. Touch  
in the top left corner to display the Task  
Manager application.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
   
3. Touch Downloaded to view applications installed from  
Google Play. Touch Uninstall to remove an application  
from your device.  
Installing a Memory Card  
1. Open the Memory Card Slot cover and turn to expose  
the slot.  
4. Touch RAM manager to display the amount of Random  
Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch Clear  
memory to clear inactive and background processes.  
5. Touch Storage to view internal (Device memory) and  
external (SD card) storage memory statistics.  
2. With the gold contacts facing down, carefully slide the  
memory card into the slot (1), pushing gently until it  
clicks into place (2).  
3. Replace the Memory Card Slot cover.  
6. Touch Help to view useful tips for extending battery life.  
Memory Card  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Your device supports removable microSD™ or microSDHC™  
memory cards with maximum capacities of 32 GB  
(depending on the memory card manufacturer and type).  
Memory cards are used to store music, photos, videos, and  
other files.  
Note: You can only store music files that you own (from a CD  
or purchased with the device) on a memory card.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Gently press down on the memory card (1), so that  
it pops out from the slot, and carefully pull the card  
out (2).  
Removing a Memory Card  
Important! To prevent damage to information stored on the  
memory card, unmount the card before removing it  
from the device.  
5. Replace the Memory Card Slot cover.  
Galaxy Tab Accessories  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
2. Under SD card, touch Unmount SD card  
Apps  
Settings  
.
To find accessories for your Galaxy Tab:  
.
.
3. Open the Memory Card Slot cover and turn to expose  
the slot.  
Galaxy Tab accessories display.  
2. Use your model number to find compatible  
accessories.  
Securing Your Device  
By default, the device locks automatically when the screen  
times out or you can lock it manually. You can unlock the  
device using one of the default Unlock screens or, for  
increased security, use a personal screen unlock pattern.  
For more information about creating and enabling a Screen  
For other settings related to securing your device, see  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
           
2. Swipe across the screen as shown.  
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
Locking the device manually  
Press the Power/Lock Key  
.
.
Unlocking the Device  
1. Press the Power/Lock Key  
The Lock screen displays.  
The last accessed screen displays.  
Tip: Touch one of the app shortcut icons and then swipe to  
launch that application.  
Note: You can customize the Lock screen and set the type of  
Screen Unlock you want to use (Face unlock, Pattern,  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may  
need to reset the device to regain functionality.  
If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the  
Power/Lock Key for 8 to 10 seconds.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
 
Section 2: Understanding Your Device  
This section outlines key features of your device and  
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the  
device is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the  
device.  
HD Video Player (720p)  
Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, DivX, VP8, WMV7/8,  
Sorenson Spark  
Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI (DivX), MKV, FLV, WEBM  
®
®
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including  
Features  
premium content  
10.1-inch WXGA (1280x800) TFT (PLS) LCD touch screen  
TM  
Supports HDMI/MHL connections to connect electronic devices to  
high-definition televisions (HDTVs) and displays.  
Music player that supports MP3, AAC/AAC+/EAAC+, WMA,  
OGG (vorbis), FLAC, AC-3 (only with video), and Vorbis formats  
1GB RAM memory and 16GB on-board memory, which is used for  
data storage and access  
Android Version 4.0.4, Ice Cream Sandwich  
®
Bluetooth 4.0 Wireless technology. For more information, refer  
Built-in Wi-Fi technology (802.11 b/g/n)  
3.2 Megapixel camera and camcorder plus 0.3 Megapixel  
forward-facing VGA camera  
TM  
TM  
TM  
Support for microSD and microSDHC Memory Cards  
Full integration of Google applications (Gmail, YouTube  
,
TM  
TM  
TM  
Preloaded applications such as AllShare Play , Google Play  
Books, Google PlayTM Store, Polaris Office, and Samsung  
Google Maps , and Voice Search)  
®
Messaging Features:  
TM  
Gmail  
Email (corporate and personal)  
Google Talk (Instant Messaging and Video Chat)  
TM  
Photo Gallery that supports GIF, AGIF, JPEG, PNG, BMP, WBMP,  
and WEBP formats  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Warning! This device does not support some USB storage  
1
1
2
3
Front View  
The following items can be found on the front of your device  
as illustrated.  
1. External Speakers: Used in music or video playback,  
notification tones, and for other sounds.  
2. Light Sensor: Used to control screen brightness  
automatically and when taking photos with the  
front-facing Camera.  
3. Front-facing Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or  
recording videos.  
4
4. Display Screen: The orientation of the display screen  
rotates with the tablet as you turn it. You can turn this  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
 
Top View  
The following items can be found on the top  
of your device as illustrated.  
Back and Bottom Views  
The following items can be found on the back and bottom of  
your device.  
1. Power/Lock Key: Press and hold to  
turn the device on or off. Press to  
lock the device or to wake the screen  
for unlocking.  
1. Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or recording  
videos.  
1
2
2. Microphone: Used for video chat.  
3. Charger/Accessory Port: Plug in a USB cable for  
charging or to sync music and files.  
2. Volume Key: From a Home screen,  
press to adjust Master Volume.  
During music playback, press to  
adjust volume.  
1
3
3. Memory Card Slot: Install a memory  
card for storage of files.  
4
5
4. Infrared Blaster: Used to emit infrared  
signals used for controlling external  
5. 3.5mm Headset Jack: Plug in for  
headphones.  
6
Model:SGH-I497 SKU:SGHI498ZSA FCC ID:A3LSGHI497 RATED:5V=;2A  
For Information Call  
1
888 987 4357 MADE IN CHINA BY SAMSUNG  
6. SIM Card Port: Insert your SIM card  
here.  
2
3
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Home Screen  
The Home screen is the starting point for using your device.  
1
2
3
5
7
4
6
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
1. Google Search: Search the web by typing or speaking.  
2. Widgets: Applications that run on the Home screen.  
These widgets are found on the Home screen by  
3. Home screen: The starting point for using your device.  
Place shortcuts, widgets and other items to customize  
your device to your needs.  
14 15 16  
8
10  
12  
13  
11  
9
4. Current screen: Indicates which Home screen is being  
6. Primary Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common features.  
These shortcuts are found on the Home screen by  
5. App Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common applications. For  
7. Apps: Display the Apps screen.  
8. Back: Return to the previous screen or option.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
   
9. Home: Display the central Home screen. Touch and  
hold to display the Task Manager pop-up.  
10. Navigation: Open a list of thumbnail images of apps  
you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open  
it. Touch and then touch Task manager to display the  
Task Manager.  
14. Notification Icons: Presents icons to show notifications  
from the system or from an application. Touch a  
Notification Icon to display more detail. For a list of  
15. Time: The current time. For more information, refer to  
11. Quick Launch: This softkey can be set to launch several  
different applications. The default setting is Screen  
16. Status Icons: Indicate the status of your tablet. Touch  
the Time / Status Icons area to display the Status  
12. Mini App Tray: Shortcuts to apps that you can use  
anytime, such as a calculator, email, and a music  
Extended Home Screen  
The Home screen consists of the Home panel, plus two  
panels that extend beyond the display width to provide more  
space for adding shortcuts and widgets.  
13. System Bar: The area along the bottom of the Home  
screen where you can find navigation buttons and  
icons that show notifications, battery power, and  
connection details.  
Slide your finger horizontally across the screen to scroll to  
the left or right side panels. As you scroll, the indicator at the  
top of the display shows your current position.  
Note: The center panel displays when you touch  
Home.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adding and Removing Home Screen Panels  
Your device comes with seven Home screen panels. You can  
customize the Home screen by removing or adding panels.  
Customizing the Home Screens  
To customize the Home screens to suit your preferences:  
1. Navigate to one of the Home screen panels.  
2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
pop-up displays.  
Note: The panel in the center position displays when you touch  
Home  
.
3. Under Add to Home screen touch:  
• Apps and widgets to add app or widget shortcuts on the  
Home screen.  
1. From a Home screen, pinch the screen from the left  
and right side to the center to display the editing  
screen.  
– or –  
• Folder to add a folder on a Home screen. For more  
• Page to add or remove a Home screen. For more information,  
Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
pop-up displays. Under Add to Home screen, touch  
Page  
.
– or –  
Display Settings  
You can customize display screen settings to your  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
 
2. Use these controls to configure panels:  
Delete: Touch and drag a panel to the Trash  
Note: When the on-screen keyboard is active,  
Close  
Keyboard displays.  
Can to remove the panel from the Home  
screen.  
Home  
Touch  
Home to display the first center Home screen.  
Add: Touch to add a new panel, up to a total  
of seven. This option is available when less  
than seven panels have been added.  
Navigation  
Touch  
Navigation to open a list of thumbnail images of  
apps you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open it.  
Touch Remove all to clear all thumbnail images.  
Touch Task manager to display the Task Manager.  
Screen Capture  
Default Home Page: Touch the Home icon at  
the upper right corner of a panel to set it as  
the default home screen.  
3. To rearrange the order of panels, touch and drag a  
Touch  
Screen Capture to capture and add an  
panel to a new location.  
image of the current screen to the clipboard. Touch and  
hold to capture an image of the current screen and edit  
4. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen  
Navigating Your Device  
the image, then touch  
Save to save the image.  
Use command buttons and the touch screen to navigate.  
Note: A copy of the screenshot is automatically saved to the  
Command Buttons  
Back  
clipboard.  
Touch  
step.  
Back to return to the previous screen, option, or  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
To view the screen shots:  
Application Bar  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
The Application Bar is the area along the top of various  
application screens. It usually contains the Search and Menu  
icons, as well as other icons that are used to display options  
and settings.  
My Files  
.
2. Touch sdcard  
Pictures  
Screenshots.  
3. Touch a screen capture file to display it.  
Screen Navigation  
Touch  
Touch items to select or launch them. For example:  
Note: This softkey can be modified to launch other  
Touch the on-screen keyboard to enter characters or text.  
Touch a menu item to select it.  
Other Buttons  
Google Search  
Touch an application’s icon to launch the application.  
Touch and Hold  
Activate on-screen items. For example:  
Touch  
Google to search the web or your device.  
Context-Sensitive Menus  
Context-sensitive menus offer options for features or  
screens. To access context-sensitive menus:  
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.  
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.  
Swipe, Flick, or Slide  
Swipe, flick, or slide your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. For example:  
Touch  
Menu to display a list of options.  
Touch an option in the list.  
Unlocking the screen.  
Scrolling the Home screens or a menu.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
     
Pinch  
Most apps that send notifications, such as Gmail and Google  
Talk, have individual settings that can be configured. See the  
settings for individual applications in the applicable section  
of this user manual.  
Use two fingers, such as your index finger  
and thumb, to make an inward pinch  
motion on the screen, as if you are picking  
something up, or an outward motion by  
sweeping your fingers out.  
Status Details  
To display the current date and time, battery status, and  
Wi-Fi connectivity status, open Status Details.  
1. Touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
For example:  
Pinch a photo in Gallery to zoom in.  
Pinch a webpage to zoom in or out.  
The Status Details display. If you have any current  
notifications, their summaries are listed below the  
Notifications title.  
Notifications  
When you receive a notification, the Notification icon displays  
in the System Bar, to the left of the Time. Notifications  
indicate the arrival of Gmail, Email, alarms, and more.  
2. Touch a notification summary to respond to it.  
3. Touch outside the Status Details screen to close the  
window.  
Touch a Notification icon for more detail. For example, touch  
a Gmail Notification icon to see who sent the message.  
Touch the Time field to open the Notifications list to view all  
of your current notifications. Touch a Notification in the list to  
display the item. For example, touch a Gmail entry to open  
the Gmail application and view the message.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Touch the time at the top of the pop-up to display a  
Date and time pop-up. Touch Automatic date and time  
or Automatic time zone to use network-provided date  
and time or time zone. Touch Use 24-hour format to  
enable the 24-hour format. Touch Manual setup to  
display the Date & time settings screen. For more  
3. The Quick Settings are:  
Quick Settings  
To view and control the most common settings for your  
tablet, as well as accessing the complete Settings  
application, open the Quick Settings panel.  
1. Touch the Time in the System Bar.  
The Quick Settings pop-up displays.  
• Wi-Fi: Touch to enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information,  
• Bluetooth: Touch to enable or disable Bluetooth. For more  
• GPS: Touch to enable or disable Standalone GPS services  
.
• Sound / Mute: Touch to enable or disable sound mode.  
• Screen rotation: When On the screen rotates automatically  
from landscape to portrait and vice versa. When Off the screen  
is fixed in the current mode, either portrait or landscape. For  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
   
Sweep the pop-up to the left to see additional settings.  
4. Touch Clear to remove Notification Icons from the  
System Bar.  
• Mobile data: Disables mobile data so you can no longer use  
applications such as Browser, Email, and YouTube using a  
mobile network.  
5. Touch a notification entry to display the details.  
6. Close the Quick Settings by touching in the upper,  
X
right corner of the Quick Settings pop-up or by  
touching outside the Quick Settings screen.  
• Power saving: When enabled, your device automatically  
analyzes the screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve  
Quick Settings also display icons under the Notifications  
heading to alert you to activity on the tablet such as new  
messages, application downloads, software updates, and  
more. The following table lists those icons.  
• Airplane mode: Touch to enable or disable Airplane mode. For  
• Driving mode: New notifications are read aloud when enabled.  
• Sync: Synchronizes your device with the network.  
Synchronizes contacts, email, time, and a variety of accounts.  
• Brightness: Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or  
touch Auto to allow the device to set brightness automatically  
based on available light and battery charge status. For more  
• Settings: Touch to open the Settings application. For more  
Download Successful: A recent application download  
or update completed successfully.  
New Email Message: You have new email. Touch  
Reply to view and answer the email.  
New Gmail Message: You have new Gmail. Touch the  
icon for additional information.  
Google Talk Invitation: Someone has invited you to  
chat using Google Talk.  
Wi-Fi networks available: An open Wi-Fi network is  
in range.  
• Notifications: Displays system notifications. For more  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Bar  
Wi-Fi Connected: Your device is connected to a Wi-Fi  
network.  
The Status Bar is part of the System Bar and displays icons  
to show network status, battery power, and other details.  
Samsung account: Set up your Samsung account.  
Battery Fully Charged: When the battery is fully  
charged, this indicator is displayed.  
Software update: There is a software update  
available for this device.  
Battery Level: Shown fully charged.  
Updates Available: Updates to the applications you  
have downloaded are available.  
Charging Indicator: Battery is charging.  
SIM Installed: A SIM card is installed in your tablet.  
Device Power Critical: Battery has only three percent  
power remaining. At about 15 percent power  
remaining, a popup is displayed to remind you to  
charge immediately.  
No SIM: A SIM card has not been installed in your  
tablet.  
Signal Strength: Displays your current signal strength.  
The greater the number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
USB Connection Indicator: The device is connected  
to a computer using a USB cable, but it is not  
charging. The battery is only charged while  
connected to a computer, if the device is turned off.  
When the device is off, press the Power/Lock key to  
see the battery charging indicator.  
Download in progress: An application is being  
downloaded to the device.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
   
Airplane Mode: Indicates that the Airplane Mode is  
active, which allows you to use many of your  
device’s features, but it cannot access online  
information or applications.  
GPS Active: Displays when GPS is active.  
Alarm Set: Displays when you set an alarm to ring at  
Set up input methods: When the keyboard is being  
displayed, touch this icon to display a menu of quick  
keyboard settings.  
Event: This is a notification for one or more events.  
Bluetooth Active: Bluetooth is turned on. For more  
Screenshot Captured: A screenshot has been  
Bluetooth Connected: Your device is connected to a  
Bluetooth device.  
Nearby Devices: The Nearby devices setting is  
Wi-Fi Active: Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
Wi-Fi Direct: Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active  
and your tablet is connected to another device. For  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adding Widgets to a Home screen  
1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to  
place the Widget.  
Primary Shortcuts  
Primary Shortcuts appear at the bottom of the main Home  
screen.  
2. From that Home screen, touch  
Apps.  
Tip: The main Home screen is usually the center Home screen.  
3. Touch the Widgets tab.  
The default Primary Shortcuts are: Browser, Camera, Play  
Store, AT&T, and Settings.  
Note: Swipe across the screen horizontally to view all Widgets.  
There are also application shortcuts on the third Home  
screen, which are: Calendar, Contacts, Gallery, Maps,  
Music Player, Video Player, Zinio, Amazon Kindle, Smart  
Remote, and Real Racing 2.  
4. Touch and hold the widget’s icon, then slide your finger  
where you want to place the icon and release it.  
Note: There must be room on the screen where you want to  
place the widget, otherwise the widget will not add to  
the Home screen.  
Application shortcuts can be added to any Home screen. For  
5. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen.  
Widgets  
Removing Widgets  
When you first turn on your tablet, there are various widgets  
on the center Home screen. They can also appear on the  
Home screens to the left and right of the center Home  
screen.  
Touch and hold the Widget until the  
Delete icon  
displays, then drag the widget toward the top of the  
screen and drop it over the Delete icon.  
Widgets are self-contained applications that you can place  
on the Home screens to access your favorite features.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
           
Calendar: Displays a list of your events. For more  
Calendar (mini today): Use Calendar to organize events and tasks  
Widget Options  
The following widgets are available.  
Alarm: Add an alarm then touch the widget to edit the  
Application monitor: This application acts as a task manager  
that monitors and controls active or downloaded programs, RAM,  
Calendar (month): Use S Planner to organize events and tasks for  
Calendar (task): Use S Planner to view and edit tasks. For more  
AT&T Communication Manager: An easy-to-use, all-in-one tool  
that helps you view and manage your data plan. This widget is  
available in two sizes: 4 x 1 and 3 x 2.  
Clock (funky): Display a funky, analog clock.  
AT&T Navigator: Provides access to real-time GPS-driven  
applications. These programs not only allow you to achieve  
turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local searches.  
AT&T Search: Use AT&T Navigator to search for an address, a  
business, or a category.  
Clock (modern): Display a modern, analog clock.  
Contact: Display a link to one of your contacts to quickly  
compose an Email or Gmail message. For more information, refer  
Contact: Display a shortcut to one of your contact entries. For  
Digital clock: Display the digital time, the day, and the date.  
Directions & Navigation: Get directions and navigation from  
AT&T Traffic: Use AT&T Navigator to get directions from your  
current location to another address.  
Book: Touch this widget and then touch a book for quick access  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual clock (analog)  
different locations using analog clocks. For more  
:
Display the date and time for two  
Google Play Music: Use this widget to control the playback of  
songs playing in the Music app. For more information, refer to  
Dual clock (digital)  
:
Display the date and time for two  
Google Search: Display a Google Search bar. For more  
different locations using a digital format. For more  
Email: Display your email inbox. For more information, refer to  
TM  
Google+ posts: Display a shortcut to Google+ posts. For more  
Media Hub: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest  
movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For more  
Memo: Create and save a memo on a Home screen. For more  
Email account: Access an Email account. Appears once an Email  
account is set up. If you have more than one Email account set  
up, touch the one to which you want to link. For more information,  
Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
Gmail label: Access a Gmail label. Displays once a Gmail account  
is set up. Touch the label to which you want to link. For more  
Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with  
one earbud.  
Music Player: The Music Player allows you to play music files  
that you have stored on your device and memory card. You can  
Google Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
Music playlist: Choose a music playlist to access from a home  
Traffic: Enter a name for the widget and a destination, and then  
touch Save. Touch the widget to use the Traffic component of the  
Picture frame: Allows you to select one or more pictures and then  
touch the arrow on the widget for a slide show. For more  
Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on your tablet. For  
Play Store: Download applications from the Google Play™ Store.  
S Bookmark: Create a bookmark for a favorite website. For more  
S Bookmarks: Choose one of your Browser bookmarks then  
touch the widget to open the website. For more information, refer  
Weather  
widget to choose locations.  
Yahoo! Finance Search for and add stocks. For more  
:
Display the forecast from AccuWeather. Touch the  
:
Yahoo! News: Display current news and much more from Yahoo!  
YouTube: Search YouTube and watch videos. For more  
S Suggest: Recommends popular applications, when your device  
is connected to a Wi-Fi, that are guaranteed to be compatible with  
YPmobile (large) and YPmobile (small): The YPmobile  
(Yellowpages) application provides quick and ready access to  
businesses, map locations, and storage of your favorite searches.  
This widget is available in two sizes: 4 x 2 and 4 x 1. For more  
Settings shortcut: Allows you to create a shortcut to a particular  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing App Shortcuts  
Touch and hold the App Shortcut until  
App Shortcuts  
Use App Shortcuts for quick access to applications or  
features, such as Email or other applications.  
1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to  
place the App Shortcut.  
Delete  
displays at the top of the screen, then drag the App  
Shortcut to the Delete icon.  
Folders  
2. Touch  
Apps.  
Place Folders on the Home screen to organize items together  
on the Home screen.  
– or –  
Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
options pop-up displays.  
Adding Folders  
To create a folder on a Home page:  
1. Navigate to the desired Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
pop-up displays.  
Under Add to Home screen touch Apps and widgets  
.
3. Touch the Apps tab.  
4. Touch and hold the application icon, then slide your  
finger where you want to place the icon and release it.  
For a list of applications, see “Apps Screen” on  
3. Under Add to Home screen touch Folder  
.
A new folder displays on the Home screen.  
5. Touch and hold the App Shortcut and then drag the  
application icon to reposition it on the Home screen.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
         
Managing Folders  
To name a folder:  
Wallpapers  
You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen,  
Lock screen, or on both the Home and Lock screens. Choose  
from preloaded wallpaper images or select a photo you have  
downloaded or taken with the Camera.  
Touch the folder, touch the Unnamed folder field, and  
use the keyboard to enter a name for the folder.  
To add an App shortcut to a folder:  
1. Add the App shortcut to the Home screen that the  
folder is on.  
1. From a Home screen, touch and hold on the screen.  
The Home screen options pop-up displays.  
2. Touch Set wallpaper for  
The Set wallpaper for pop-up displays.  
3. Touch Home screen Lock screen, or Home and lock  
screens  
.
2. Touch and hold the App shortcut, drag it to the folder,  
and drop it.  
,
To remove an App shortcut from a folder:  
1. Touch the folder to view the contents.  
2. Touch the App shortcut, drag it out of the folder, and  
drop it on the Home screen.  
.
The Select wallpaper from pop-up displays the  
following options:  
• Gallery: Access the Gallery to select a photo. Touch a photo to  
select it. Crop and resize the picture, if desired. Touch Done to  
save the picture as wallpaper. Touch Cancel to cancel.  
Removing a Folder  
Touch and hold the folder until the  
Delete icon  
displays, then drag the folder toward the top of the  
• Live wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded interactive animated  
wallpapers. Touch a wallpaper to see an example. If available,  
touch Settings to view options for the selection. Touch Set  
screen and drop it over the Delete icon.  
Note: Any App shortcuts in the folder are deleted.  
wallpaper to save your choice. Touch  
Back to return to  
the Live wallpapers menu.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded wallpaper images. Touch  
an image to view it. Touch Set wallpaper to save it as  
2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray to customize the  
3. Touch one of the icons to display a mini app pop-up.  
The pop-up varies depending on the application.  
Various controls display at the top of the pop-up and  
other information is displayed in the body of the  
pop-up.  
wallpaper. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen.  
Note: Live wallpapers is not available for the Lock screen.  
Mini App Tray  
There are shortcuts available that link to apps that you might  
need while working in other apps, such as Alarm, Calculator,  
Calendar, Email, Music Player, Task manager, and World  
Clock. In some cases, these shortcuts are actually links to  
the part of the app you need most and they contain a link to  
the actual app where you can use other functions.  
4. Touch options (such as  
) to create new app items  
(such as alarms or events).  
5. Touch items in the body of the pop-up, such as an  
email entry or keys on the Calculator.  
1. From any screen, touch  
Mini App Tray at the  
6. Touch  
7. Touch to close the mini app pop-up.  
to link to the application. For more  
bottom, center of the screen.  
The Mini App Tray icons display.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
   
To manually change the order of the icons on the Apps  
screen:  
Customizing the Mini App Tray  
You can choose applications to display on the Mini App Tray  
and arrange them in any order.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Edit  
Apps.  
.
1. From any screen, touch  
Mini App Tray at the  
bottom, center of the screen.  
3. Touch and hold an icon and drag it to a new position.  
2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray.  
3. Touch and drag apps in and out of the tray or to  
another position in the tray.  
4. Touch Save to save the changes.  
You can place shortcuts to applications on the Home screen  
for quick access to the application. For more information,  
4. Touch Done to save your changes.  
To view your downloaded applications:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps Screen  
Apps.  
The Apps screen displays all applications installed on your  
wireless device. Applications that you download and install  
from Google Play™ or from the web are also added to a  
Home screen.  
2. Touch Menu Downloaded applications  
.
3. Touch an icon on the Downloaded applications screen  
to launch the application.  
– or –  
The Apps icons are arranged in a customizable grid. To  
arrange the Apps icons in alphabetical order:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu View type  
Add an App Shortcut to a Home screen by dragging the  
App icon onto the Home Screen. For more information,  
Apps.  
.
3. Touch Alphabetical grid  
.
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Amazon Kindle: Download Amazon® books to read  
on your device. A shortcut to Amazon KindleTM  
displays on a Home screen by default. For more  
Application Information  
To view information about an App, such as the amount of  
storage it uses, force the App to stop, uninstall updates, and  
clear data:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Application manager  
Apps  
Settings  
AT&T: myAT&T allows you to manage your own  
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill,  
check minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new  
device, or change your rate plan. A shortcut to AT&T  
displays on the Home screen in an AT&T folder by  
.
2. Touch the All tab, scroll through the apps list, and  
touch the app to open a screen with details about  
the App.  
Applications  
The following is an alphabetical list of the applications that  
come preloaded on your device.  
AT&T Communication Manager: This is an easy-to-  
use, all-in-one tool that helps you view and manage  
Alarm: Schedule alarms to remind you of  
appointments or events, or as a wake-up. For more  
AllShare PlayTM: Share your on-device media  
content with other external devices using DLNA  
(Digital Living Network Alliance) and built-in  
AllShare Play technology. For more information,  
AT&T FamilyMap: This app provides peace of mind  
because you can use it to conveniently locate a  
family member on a map from your wireless device.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
 
AT&T Navigator: AT&T Navigator provides turn-by-  
turn navigation and access to local searches. A  
shortcut to AT&T Navigator displays on the Home  
screen in an AT&T folder by default. For more  
Contacts: Save and manage contact information for  
your friends and colleagues. A shortcut to Contacts  
displays on a Home screen by default. For more  
Downloads: Files, apps, and other items you  
download in Browser, Email, Gmail, or in other  
ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal storage.  
Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete  
Browser: Access the Internet. A shortcut to Browser  
displays on the Home screen by default. For more  
Calculator: The calculator provides the basic  
arithmetic functions to solve simple arithmetic  
problems and advanced operators to solve more  
Email: Send and receive email from your device. For  
Gallery: View and manage photos stored on your  
device. A shortcut to Gallery displays on a Home  
Calendar: Record events and appointments to  
manage your schedule. A shortcut to Calendar  
displays on a Home screen by default. For more  
Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s  
Camera: Take photos or record videos. A shortcut to  
Camera displays on the Home screen by default. For  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Google+: Share updates and see what is going on  
Messages: AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls,  
and voicemail messages together into a single  
conversation thread and is accessible by phone or  
computer. A shortcut to Messages displays on the  
Messenger: With Google MessengerTM, you can  
bring groups of friends together into a simple group  
Latitude: Use Google Latitude to locate your friends  
on a map and share or hide your location. For more  
Local: Use Google Local and Google Maps to find  
places of interest and to add your own favorite  
Music Player Play music and other audio files that you  
:
Maps: Find locations and get directions with Google  
maps. A shortcut to Maps displays on a Home  
copy from your computer. A shortcut to Music Player  
displays on a Home screen by default. For more  
My Files: Find, view and manage files stored on an  
optional installed memory card. For more  
Navigation: Use Google Maps NavigationTM to  
search for locations, with turn-by-turn directions.  
Media Hub: Browse the latest movies and TV shows,  
then rent or purchase the media for viewing on your  
Memo: Create text memos and use Bluetooth to  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
Photo editor: To perfect any photos stored on your  
tablet, use Photo editor to crop, rotate, resize,  
adjust color and contrast, and much more. For more  
Play Store: Browse, download, and install Android  
applications. A shortcut to Play Store displays on  
the Home screen by default. For more information,  
Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based  
Google Play Books service. For more information,  
Polaris Office: This application provides a central  
place for managing your documents online or  
Play Magazines: Google Play Magazines helps you  
subscribe to your favorite magazines so you can  
have them available to read on your tablet at your  
Real Racing 2: A realistic racing game with  
incredible resolution. A shortcut to Real Racing 2  
displays on a Home screen by default.  
S Suggest: Recommends popular applications,  
when your device is connected to a Wi-Fi, that are  
guaranteed to be compatible with your device. For  
Play Movies & TV: Use the Play Movies & TV app to  
view movies you rent from Google Play™ Movies &  
TV or play any of your personal videos stored on  
Search: Search the web by typing or speaking. For  
Play Music Play music and other audio files that you  
copy from your computer with the Music app. For more  
:
Settings: Configure your device to your preferences.  
A shortcut to Settings displays on the Home screen  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Smart Remote: Locate and watch programming on  
your tv and then control your entertainment system  
with gestures from the device. A shortcut to Smart  
Remote displays on a Home screen by default. For  
YouTube: View and upload YouTube videos, right  
YPmobile: The YPmobile (Yellowpages) application  
provides quick and ready access to businesses,  
map locations, and storage of your favorite  
Talk: Chat with other Google Talk users. For more  
Video Maker: Create a movie, using a video you  
download or record with Camera, or by combining  
images. Add audio, to create a soundtrack, then  
share your movie with your friends. For more  
Zinio: Zinio is an app for reading and downloading  
your favorite magazines. You can browse for  
magazines, download subscriptions or single issues  
and sync your magazines on multiple devices. A  
shortcut to Zinio displays on a Home screen by  
Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on  
your tablet. A shortcut to Video Player displays on a  
World Clock: View the date and time in any time  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
   
Section 3: Entering Text  
This section describes how to enter words, letters,  
punctuation and numbers when you need to enter text.  
Text Input Methods  
Your device offers two text input methods.  
Samsung Keyboard  
Google voice typing: You can use your voice to enter text  
using the Voice input feature. Your device recognizes your  
speech and enters text for you. For more information, refer  
Your device uses a virtual QWERTY keyboard for text entry  
called the Samsung keyboard. Use the keyboard to enter  
letters, punctuation, numbers, and other characters into text  
entry fields or applications. Access the keyboard by touching  
any text entry field.  
Samsung keyboard: The Samsung keyboard is also a virtual  
QWERTY keyboard that allows you to enter text by touching keys  
on the screen. The Samsung keyboard includes predictive text,  
which matches your key touches to common words so that you  
can select the word to enter it into your text.  
The keyboard displays at the bottom of the screen. By  
default, when you rotate the device, the screen orientation  
updates to display the keyboard at the bottom of the screen.  
Changing the Input Method  
When entering text, you can select the text input method.  
1. Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar.  
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.  
2. Touch an input method to activate it.  
3. Touch  
to display that input method’s settings.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Configuring the Keyboard  
To configure the Samsung keyboard to your preferences:  
Using the Samsung Keyboard  
The Samsung keyboard is a custom virtual QWERTY  
keyboard, featuring predictive text. Input characters by  
touching the on-screen keys with your finger or use speech  
recognition.  
Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar and  
then touch  
next to Samsung keyboard in the Set  
up input methods pop-up.  
– or –  
As you enter characters, predictive text matches your key  
touches to common words and displays them. Select a word  
from the display to insert it into your text. For more  
Touch and hold  
to Settings  
The Samsung keyboard settings screen displays.  
Options on the keyboard and slide  
.
Your tablet also provides handwriting recognition to make the  
task of text entry that much easier.  
Delete  
Key  
Entering Upper and Lower Case Letters  
The default case is lower case (abc). Enter upper and lower  
New  
Paragraph  
case alphabet letters by touching the Shift key  
the case, before touching the letter key(s).  
to toggle  
Shift  
Key  
Touch once to switch from abc to Abc mode.  
Touch twice to switch to ABC mode. When ABC mode is enabled,  
the Shift key background turns blue.  
Remove  
Text  
Input  
Mode  
Settings/  
Space Bar  
Select  
Language  
Keyboard  
Voice Input/  
Handwriting/  
Clipboard  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
     
Entering Symbols and Numbers  
The number keys are displayed at the top of the keyboard  
and are always available.  
Using XT9 Predictive Text  
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction  
and regional error correction, which compensates for users  
pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.  
To enter common symbols, touch  
to switch to Symbols  
1. Touch  
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.  
2. Touch Set up input methods  
The Language and input settings screen displays.  
3. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display  
Samsung keyboard settings.  
Set up input methods in the Status bar.  
mode, then touch the corresponding key.  
1/2  
There are two pages of symbols. Touch  
next page.  
to switch to the  
.
Touch and hold a vowel key (A, E, I, O, U, or Y) or the C, N, or  
S key to open a small window where you can chose an  
accented vowel or other alternate letter. Slide to the letter  
until it is highlighted, and release.  
4. Touch the Predictive text  
OFF / ON icon to turn  
Touch and hold the Period key ( . ) to open a small window  
with a set of common symbols.  
Predictive text ON.  
5. Touch the Predictive text field to modify XT9 associated  
Other Keyboard Functions  
Touch  
to select the language, if more than one language  
has been set. The current language displays on the space  
bar.  
Note: The XT9 option is available only when ABC mode has  
Touch and hold  
Options and slide to  
Handwriting to  
been selected.  
use the Handwriting feature. For more information, refer to  
Touch and hold  
Options and slide to  
Clipboard to  
view the clipboard and manage saved text.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Begin typing a word.  
Adding Words To Your Word List  
A list of word options displays.  
To add more word options:  
1. Touch  
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.  
2. Touch Set up input methods  
The Language and input settings screen displays.  
3. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display  
Samsung keyboard settings.  
4. Touch My word list  
5. Touch Add  
6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the word.  
7. Touch Done  
Set up input methods in the Status bar.  
.
.
.
.
Deleting Words From Your Word List  
To delete words from your word list:  
7. Touch  
to display more words.  
1. Navigate to My word list. For more information, refer to  
8. Continue typing your message. XT9 mode can be used  
2. Touch  
3. Touch the existing words you want to delete or touch  
Select all, and then touch Delete  
4. Touch Delete  
Delete.  
in portrait or landscape mode.  
.
.
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
 
2. Touch and drag either tab to select more or less text.  
Editing Text  
You can edit the text you enter in text fields by cutting,  
copying, or pasting text. These operations can be performed  
within and across apps. However, some apps do not support  
editing some or all of the text displayed while others may  
offer their own way to select text.  
Editing Existing Text  
To edit text that you have entered:  
Tip: Touch Select all in the Application bar to select all text in  
the field. Touch on another area of the screen or touch  
Done to deselect the text.  
3. Depending on the action you want to take for the  
selected text, in the Application bar touch:  
• Select all to highlight all text in the field.  
• Cut to remove the selected text.  
1. Touch the text at the point you want to edit.  
The  
Cursor displays at the point you touched.  
• Copy to save the selected text to the clipboard.  
– or –  
2. Touch and drag the Cursor to a better position, if  
necessary.  
Enter text by typing or speaking to replace the  
selection with what you type.  
3. Enter additional text or delete text by repeatedly  
touching the  
Delete key.  
– or –  
Copying, Deleting, or Replacing Text  
To select and copy, delete, or replace text:  
Touch the  
Delete key to delete the selected text.  
1. Touch and hold the text or word you want to select.  
The selected text is highlighted with a  
each end of the selection.  
tab at  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pasting Text  
To paste previously copied text:  
Using T9 Trace  
T9 Trace allows you to enter words by gliding your finger  
over the virtual QWERTY keypad, lifting your finger between  
words.  
1. Touch the text at the point you want to paste the copied  
text.  
To enable T9 Trace:  
The  
Cursor displays at the point you touched.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
2. Touch the Cursor.  
Language and input.  
A pop-up displays.  
2. Touch  
next to Samsung keyboard.  
3. Touch Paste in the pop-up.  
The Samsung keyboard settings screen displays.  
To paste text directly from the clipboard:  
1. Touch and hold  
3. Touch T9 Trace to enable the T9 Trace option.  
Options and slide to  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Clipboard to display the text saved to the  
clipboard.  
The following example shows how to enter the word “this”.  
Put your finger down on the “t” and, without lifting, glide it to  
the “h”, then to the “i”, then over to the “s”.  
2. Touch a text block to paste that text where the Cursor is  
positioned.  
Closing the Keyboard  
To close the keyboard:  
Touch  
Close Keyboard.  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
   
Punctuation: Touch and hold a key to view a punctuation menu  
and make a selection.  
Error correction: If you make a mistake, double-tap on the word  
you want to change and then glide over the letters of the correct  
word.  
Using the Handwriting Feature  
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite  
letters on your screen.  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, activate the  
keyboard by touching a text input field on the screen.  
2. If necessary, touch  
Set up input methods in the  
Here are a few tips to get you started:  
Status bar and then touch Samsung keyboard  
.
Auto-spacing: When you finish a word, just lift your finger and  
start the next word.  
The Samsung keyboard displays.  
3. Touch and hold  
Options and slide to  
Double letters: Just “scribble” on the key.  
Handwriting  
.
Auto-capitalization: T9 Trace recognizes and capitalizes the first  
word of sentences. If you want to capitalize a word that is not at  
The handwriting pad displays.  
4. Use your finger tip to write out each character.  
the beginning of a sentence, touch the Shift key  
glide over the letters in the word.  
and then  
Note: To properly recognize the written characters and to  
Contractions: T9 Trace recognizes most words that include an  
apostrophe, just swipe the letters of the word, including the  
prevent scratching of the LCD, do not use script.  
apostrophe.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
As you write, suggestions are offered in the word options  
area in case the correct letters were not recognized.  
Handwriting Tips  
For uppercase letters, write the letter larger than the lowercase  
letters.  
Settings/  
Write a dash (horizontal line) to add a space.  
Delete words by sweeping backward across them.  
?#+  
Voice Input/  
Keyboard/  
Clipboard  
Input Writing /  
Line Return  
Word  
Options  
To display numbers and symbols, touch  
and then touch a  
Remove  
Keyboard  
Select  
Language  
number or symbol key. Touch the button marked 1/3, 2/3, or 3/3  
Numbers  
Text  
Input  
Mode  
and  
Delete  
Key  
Space  
Bar  
to see more symbols and emoticons. Touch  
numbers and symbols keyboard.  
to exit the  
Symbols  
To return to the Samsung keyboard, touch and hold  
Options and slide to Keyboard  
Handwriting Settings  
To change the Handwriting settings:  
1. Touch and then touch Set up input methods  
The Language and input settings screen displays.  
2. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display  
Samsung keyboard settings.  
3. Touch Handwriting  
The following settings can be changed:  
.
.
Handwriting  
area  
.
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
• Recognition time: Set the time it takes for your tablet to  
recognize what you write. Choose from 100ms, 300ms,  
500ms, 1000ms, or 2000ms.  
Using Speech Recognition  
You can use your voice to enter text using the Voice input  
feature, which lets you enter text by speaking. The Samsung  
keyboard recognizes your speech and enters text for you.  
• Pen thickness: Change the pen thickness to 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9  
pixels, as the examples demonstrate.  
1. Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar and  
then touch Google voice typing in the Set up input  
• Pen color: Change the pen color to black, red, blue, green, or  
brown.  
methods pop-up to enable Voice Input  
.
– or –  
• Recognition type: Set the way your tablet recognizes what you  
write.  
Touch  
Settings and slide to  
Voice Input.  
Complete recognition: The letters are not entered in the text  
field until you touch  
word options.  
Enter, which gives you time to choose  
2. At the Listening prompt, speak clearly and distinctly  
into the microphone.  
Stroke recognition: The letters are entered in the text field as  
you write.  
The software converts your voice to text, which is  
displayed in the message.  
• Gesture guide: Displays a list of gesture that can be used with  
the handwriting feature.  
3. Keep speaking to add more test.  
Tutorial: Displays information for entering handwritten text.  
• About: Describes the version, date, and manufacturer of the  
handwriting software.  
4. Touch Done to display the Samsung keyboard.  
Note: The Speech Recognition feature works best when you  
4. Press  
repeatedly to return to your message.  
break your message down into smaller segments.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 4: Contacts and Accounts  
This section explains how to manage contacts and accounts.  
Setting Up Your Accounts  
Set up and manage your synchronized accounts with the  
Accounts and sync setting.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts  
Your device can synchronize with a variety of accounts. With  
synchronization, information on your device is updated with  
any information that changes in your accounts.  
Apps  
Settings  
Accounts and sync.  
Samsung account: Add your Samsung account. For more  
2. Touch  
Add account, then touch the account type.  
3. Follow the prompts to enter your account credentials to  
complete the set-up process.  
Email: Add an Email account to sync Contacts. For more  
4. The device communicates with account servers to set  
up your account. When complete, your account  
displays in the Manage accounts area of the Accounts  
and sync screen.  
Facebook: Add your Facebook account to sync Contacts.  
Google: Add your Google account to sync your Contacts, Calendar,  
LDAP: Add an LDAP account to find entries in an LDAP directory  
server.  
Contacts  
Store contact information for your friends, family, and  
colleagues to quickly access information or to send a  
message.  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync: Add your Exchange account to  
sync Contacts, Calendar, and Email.  
Tip: Contacts displays by default as a Primary shortcut on a  
Home screen.  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
             
To access Contacts:  
From a Home screen, touch  
• Name: Enter a first name for the contact. Touch  
Name prefix First name Middle name Last name, and  
Name suffix  
• Phone: Enter a telephone number, then touch the  
tab to choose a label from Mobile Home Work  
Home Fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback  
• Email: Enter an email address, then touch the  
to choose a label from Home Work  
create a custom label.  
• Address: Enter an address, then touch the  
choose a label from Home Work Other, or Custom to create  
to enter a  
,
,
,
Contacts  
Apps  
.
.
– or –  
Label  
From a Home screen, touch  
,
,
,
Work Fax  
,
Contacts.  
,
,
,
.
Creating Contacts  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Device or an account.  
Label tab  
Contacts  
.
,
,
Other, or Custom to  
3. Touch the Photo ID to set up a photo to identify the  
Label tab to  
contact.  
,
,
• Picture: Choose a photo from the Gallery.  
Take picture: Display the Camera and take a photo of the  
contact.  
a custom label.  
• Events: Touch  
to display an event label and field. Enter  
the event date, then touch the  
from Birthday Anniversary  
custom event. Touch  
Label tab to choose a label  
4. Touch contact fields to display the keyboard and enter  
information:  
,
,
Other, or Custom to create a  
to add additional events.  
• Groups: Touch this field to display the Select group screen. To  
assign the contact to one or more groups, touch the check box  
next to each group. When enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box. For more information about Groups,  
Tip: Touch the screen and swipe up or down to display  
additional fields or touch Next on the keyboard to move to  
the next field.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Touch  
unused field.  
6. Touch Add another field to add these additional fields:  
Phonetic name Organization IM Notes Nickname,  
Internet call, and Relationship  
Back to remove the keyboard.  
to add additional fields.Touch  
to remove an  
3. Touch  
Edit.  
4. Continue entering contact information. For more  
,
,
,
,
.
Deleting Contacts  
To delete a contact:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information, and then touch Delete. At the prompt,  
touch OK  
Website  
,
7. Touch  
Contacts.  
8. When you finish entering information, touch  
Save.  
– or –  
Touch  
Cancel  
OK to cancel and discard  
.
changes.  
Merge Contacts with Google  
You can merge a current contact with your Google account  
contacts.  
Tip: Display a contact’s record and touch the Email field to  
send an email, touch the Address field to display the  
address on a map, or touch the Website field to link to the  
website.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
2. Touch Menu Merge with Google  
.
3. Touch OK at the prompt to merge this contact with your  
Updating Contacts  
Google account.  
To update an existing contact:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information.  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
   
Send email from Contacts  
To send an email to one or more contacts:  
Contacts Display Options  
There are various ways to display your Contacts and general  
Contacts settings.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Send email  
Contacts.  
Contacts.  
.
2. Touch Groups Favorites, or Contacts, above the  
,
3. Touch each contact you want to send an email  
message or touch Select all. A check mark indicates  
contact selection.  
Contacts List, to view contacts various ways:  
• Groups: Displays the possible Groups, such as Not assigned,  
Co-workers, Family, Friends, and so on. The number of  
contacts in the group is displayed next to the group name.  
Touch a group name to show only contacts in that group. For  
4. Touch  
Done.  
5. Touch Compose Email or Compose Gmail  
.
6. Touch Use by default for this action if you want the  
same selection each time.  
7. Compose your email, then touch  
Send.  
• Favorites: Show only your favorite, or starred, contacts. For  
• Contacts: Show all your contacts. Touch the Search field and  
enter a keyword to list contacts that contain that keyword.  
Managing Photo IDs  
To remove or update a contact’s Photo ID:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Edit  
3. Touch the Photo ID, then touch Remove  
picture  
Contacts.  
.
,
Picture, or Take  
.
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. From the Contacts list, touch  
Menu to display all or  
• Import/Export: Use the USB cable to import your contacts  
from, or export your contacts to, a storage device, such as a  
some of these options:  
• Delete contacts. Touch and check mark the box next to each  
contact you want to delete. Touch Delete and then touch OK  
.
• Merge with Google: Merges the current contact with your  
Google account contacts.  
• Accounts: Displays the Accounts and sync screen so you can  
manage or synchronize this account.  
• Send email: Sends an email to the selected contact.  
• History: Displays information about the selected contact.  
• Join contact: Join a contact to one or more other contacts. For  
• Mark as default: If a contact has multiple email addresses, for  
example, touch the field that should be the default value.  
• Share namecard via: Shares the selected namecard using  
Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or through Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Settings: Configure contact settings:  
Only contacts with phones: Touch to check the box to only  
display contacts that have phone numbers.  
List by: List contacts by First name or Last name  
Display contacts by: Display contact names as First name  
first or Last name first  
.
.
Contact sharing settings: Sets parameters for sending  
contact information:  
• Print namecard: Check mark the fields you want to print and  
then touch Done. You can only print on a Samsung printer.  
• Contacts to display: Select the contacts you want to display in  
this inbox (All contacts, Google, SIM, Device, or Customized  
list).  
• Send all namecards: Allows you to transmit all of your  
current Contact entries at a single time. If the recipient  
device does not support this feature, some or all Contact  
entries might not be received.  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
Linked Contacts  
• Send individual namecards: Allows you to transmit  
single contacts, one at a time. The recipient must accept  
each namecard as it is received. This method of  
transmission ensures all contacts are received.  
Your device can synchronize with multiple accounts,  
including Google, Corporate Exchange, and other email  
providers. When you synchronize contacts from these  
accounts with your device, you may have multiple contacts  
for one person.  
4. From the Groups list, select a group and then touch  
Menu to display these Group-specific options:  
• Search: Search the group for a contact.  
Linking, or joining, imported contact records allows you to  
see all the contact’s numbers and addresses together in one  
contact entry. Linking also helps you keep your contacts  
updated, because any changes that your contacts make to  
their information in the respective accounts is automatically  
updated the next time you synchronize with the account.  
Joining Contacts  
• Delete: Touch one or more groups and touch  
Delete.  
• Edit: Change the Group name or touch Add member to add or  
delete group members.  
• Remove member: Remove a selected member from this  
group.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
• Send email: To send an email to one or more members of the  
group, touch and check mark the box next to each contact you  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information.  
want to send to, or touch Select all, and touch  
Done.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Join contact.  
Touch Compose Gmail or Compose Email as the method for  
sending the email.  
4. Touch the contact you want to Join.  
The joined contact’s information is displayed with the  
original contact’s information.  
• Change order: Changes the order of how the groups display.  
5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to join other contacts.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Separating Contacts  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Tip: Set up a contact record for yourself to share your  
Contacts.  
information with others.  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information.  
3. At the prompt, choose a sending method. Options are:  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Separate contact.  
A list of Joined contacts displays.  
4. Touch  
OK to separate a joined contact.  
The contact is removed from the list.  
Sharing Contact Information  
You can send a contact’s information by way of Bluetooth to  
other Bluetooth devices or in an Email or Gmail as an  
attachment.  
• Wi-Fi Direct: To send Contacts entries directly to an external  
device through a Wi-Fi connection.  
4. Follow the prompts to send the contact information.  
Importing and Exporting Contacts  
Note: Not all Bluetooth devices accept contacts and not all  
devices support transfers of multiple contacts. Check  
the target device’s documentation.  
To back up and restore your contacts information, you can  
export your contacts list to a storage device, such as a PC, or  
import your contacts list (previously exported) from a storage  
device.  
1. Use the USB cable to connect your device to the  
storage device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
2. Touch Menu Share namecard via  
.
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
         
2. From a Home screen, touch  
3. Touch Menu Import/Export  
4. Touch Import from USB storage Export to USB storage  
Import from SD card Export to SD card Import from SIM  
card Export to SIM card, or Share namecard via, then  
Contacts.  
Creating a New Group  
Create a new group when you add or edit a contact.  
.
,
,
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List.  
3. Touch  
Contacts.  
,
,
,
.
follow the prompts to complete the operation.  
4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to  
enter a new Group name.  
Synchronize Contacts with Accounts  
To synchronize your contacts with an account:  
5. Touch Add member to add a member to the group. For  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Accounts  
.
6. Touch  
Save to save the new group name.  
3. Touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn on Auto-sync  
.
Auto-synch controls whether changes made to  
information on your device or on the web are  
automatically synchronized with each other.  
Tip: Contacts can belong to more than one group. Just touch  
the contact’s Groups field and touch each group.  
4. Touch  
to synchronize a particular account.  
Once you create a new group, the Contacts List can be set to  
display only the contacts in that group. For more information,  
Groups  
Assign contacts to Groups to make searching for contacts  
faster or to quickly send messages to group members.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Touch Select all or the name of each group to delete.  
5. Touch Delete to delete the groups. Choose from  
Renaming a Group  
To rename a group that you created:  
Group only or Group and group members.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List and then touch  
Adding Group Members  
To add a contact to a group, just Edit a contact’s Group field.  
the group you want to rename.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Edit.  
4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to  
enter a new Group name.  
To add multiple contacts to a group:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
5. Touch Add member to add a member to the group. For  
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group to which you  
want to add members.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Add member.  
6. Touch  
Save to save the new group name.  
The contacts that can be added display.  
Deleting Groups  
To delete a group that you created:  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to add.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
.
5. Touch  
Done to add the contacts to the group.  
2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List.  
3. Touch Menu Delete  
The groups that can be deleted display.  
.
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
 
Removing Group Members  
To remove contacts from a group:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Tip: You do not have to edit the contact to change the Starred  
status.  
Contacts.  
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group from which you  
Accessing Favorites  
You can view your favorites two ways for fast viewing or  
want to remove members.  
3. Touch  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove.  
5. Touch Done to remove the contacts.  
Menu  
Remove member.  
messaging.  
To view your favorites list:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
2. Touch Favorites above the Contacts List.  
Contacts are removed from the group and the group  
name is removed from each contact’s Group field.  
Only your starred contacts display.  
Favorites  
Note: Touch Groups above the Contacts List and then touch  
Starred in Android to list the Favorites that are being  
saved on your Google account.  
Mark contact records with a  
gold star to identify them as  
favorites.  
Adding Favorites  
To add a contact to the Favorites list:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch a contact to display it.  
Contacts  
.
3. Touch the  
Star next to the contact name so that it  
turns gold  
.
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To remove one contact from your favorites list:  
Removing Favorites  
To remove one or more contacts from your favorites list:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
2. Touch a contact to display it.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Favorites above the Contacts List.  
3. Touch Menu Remove from favorites  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove.  
5. Touch Done to remove the contacts.  
Contacts.  
3. Touch the  
Star next to the contact’s name so that it  
turns gray  
to remove it from the Favorites list.  
.
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
Section 5: Messaging  
This section describes how to send and receive different  
types of messages. It also includes the features and  
functionality associated with messaging.  
3. Your account’s incoming server settings are different  
depending on the kind of email service for the account.  
If you are asked What type of account?, touch the type  
Types of Messages  
Your tablet provides the following message types:  
of account: POP3 account  
,
IMAP account, or Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync  
.
Email and Gmail Messages  
Google Talk  
The Server settings screen displays. Enter the required  
Google+  
Messenger  
4. Review the Account options screen. Available options  
vary, depending on the provider:  
Email  
• Peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent to  
this account during peak times. Options are: Push (Automatic),  
Manual, every 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12 hours.  
• Off-peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent  
to this account during off-peak times. Options are: Push  
(Automatic), Manual, every 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12  
hours.  
Use Email to view and manage all your email accounts in one  
application.  
Configuring Email Accounts  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Email.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Email.  
2. At the Set up email screen, enter an Email address and  
Password, then touch Next  
.
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• Period to sync email: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, set  
how to store email on the tablet. Options are: Automatic, All, 1  
or 3 days, 1 or 2 weeks, or 1 month.  
• Automatically download attachments when connected to  
Wi-Fi: Enable or disable auto-download of files attached to  
recent messages when connected through Wi-Fi.  
• Emails retrieval size: Set the maximum email retrieval size.  
Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or100 KB,  
or All.  
5. Touch Next to go to the next screen or touch Previous to  
go to the Apps screen.  
Note: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, the Activate device  
administrator? screen may appear. Read the information  
and touch Activate to continue.  
• Period to sync Calendar: Set how much of the calendar for  
this account to sync with your tablet. Options are: 2 weeks, 1,  
3, or 6 months, or All calendar.  
• Send email from this account by default: When enabled,  
email from your device is automatically sent from this account.  
• Notify me when email arrives: When enabled, you receive  
notifications when you receive new email sent to this account.  
• Sync Email: When enabled, email from your account is  
synchronized with your device’s email.  
6. Enter an account name for the email account just  
added, which is displayed on the email screen, and  
enter Your name, if required.  
7. Touch Done  
.
The device communicates with the appropriate server  
to set up your account and synchronize your email.  
When complete, your email appears in the Inbox for the  
account.  
• Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account  
are synchronized with your device’s Contacts.  
• Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
Note: To configure email account settings at any time, use  
Menu  
Settings. Touch the account to display  
• Sync Task: When enabled, tasks from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
Account settings.  
Messaging  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Touch the box to the left of one or more conversations  
Adding Additional Email Accounts  
To add additional email accounts:  
and then choose one of the following options:  
• Star  
: Mark the conversations with a gold star and list  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Settings  
3. Enter the Email address Password, and so on.  
Email  
.
them in the Starred folder. Touch  
to make the changes.  
Add account  
.
– or –  
Flag  
,
: Touch Set to set all flags, touch Complete to mark all  
Managing Your Email Accounts  
You can view email you receive for all accounts in the  
Combined view screen or you can view email accounts  
individually.  
conversations with a blue check mark, or touch Clear to clear all  
flags and check marks. Set flags are gold.  
• Mark as Read  
conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is  
marked as read, it has a gray background.  
/
Mark as Unread  
: Mark the  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch the drop-down menu at the top left of the  
screen to select:  
• Combined view: View all email in a combined inbox.  
Account Name>: View email for the account.  
Email.  
• Move to  
:
Relocate the conversations to another folder in  
the current email account or in a folder within another email  
account.  
<
• Delete  
3. Touch  
: Delete the conversations.  
Menu for these options:  
Managing Your Email Conversations  
In addition to managing your Email account, there are  
options for changing the status of one or more Email  
conversations in an account.  
• Sort by: Choose a method for listing your email conversations.  
• View mode: Choose how to view your email conversations.  
Choices are: Standard view and Conversations view.  
• Create folder: Create a new main folder or touch an existing  
folder to create a sub-folder.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Email.  
Note: This option is not available for all email accounts.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Delete all: Delete all items for this email account.  
• New meeting invitation: Use Calendar to add an event or add  
5. Touch the body of the email to enter the text of your  
email.  
6. While composing a message, the following options  
may be displayed:  
Priority:Settheemailpriority.Optionsare:High,  
Normal, or Low.  
• Settings: Display the settings for this email account. For more  
Tracking options: Touch Read receipt or Delivery  
receipt and then touch OK to set the tracking  
options for this email.  
Composing and Sending Email  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Email.  
2. Touch an account, if you have more than one account  
set up, then touch Compose  
3. Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.  
Security options: Set the email security options.  
Options are: Encrypt and Sign.  
.
Attach: Choose an attachment to add to the  
message from the listed apps, such as Memo,  
My Files, Picture, Audio, Video, and so on.  
If you are sending the email message to several recipients,  
separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as  
many message recipients as you want.  
Undo: Erase the previous input.  
Touch  
to add a contact to the field.  
Touch +Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients.  
Redo: Restore the previously erased input.  
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.  
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.  
Insert:Chooseanitemtoinsertintothemessage  
from the listed apps, such as Picture, Memo,  
Contacts, and so on.  
Touch +Me to add yourself as a recipient.  
4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject.  
Messaging  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Account Settings  
Account settings lets you configure handling of email on your  
device.  
Insert quick response: Insert text that you  
frequently use in email. For more information,  
Fontsize:Chooseatextfontsizeof9, 10,12, 14,  
16, 20, 24, 28, or 36 points.  
Note: Available settings may depend on the email account and  
include setting how much email to synchronize, creating  
signatures for email you send, and other handling  
options.  
Bold:Boldthefollowingtext. Touchagaintoturn  
off bold.  
Italics: This action italicizes the subsequent  
entered text.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Email.  
2. Touch Menu Settings, then touch General  
Font color: Set the color of the text font. The bar  
changes to the selected color.  
Preferences. The following options display:  
• Auto-advance: Set the screen to show after deleting a  
message. Choices are: Newer message, Older message, or  
Message list.  
Background color: Set the color of the  
background of the email.  
• Message preview line: Choose a message preview line  
amount. Options are: None or 1, 2, or 3 lines.  
• Email title: Set whether the Subject or Sender of the email is  
shown as the time.  
7. Touch  
Send to send the message.  
– or –  
Touch  
Save to save the email to the Drafts folder.  
• Confirm deletions: Touch the box to enable or disable this  
option. A check mark  
confirmed.  
indicates that deletions must be  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Quick responses: Edit text that you frequently use in email.  
Touch an email account to display the following  
settings:  
Data usage  
• Sync email: When enabled, email from your account is  
synchronized with your device’s email.  
Common settings  
• Email check frequency: Set how often to check for new email  
sent to this account during. Options are: Never, every 15, or 30  
minutes, every hour, every 4 hours, or once a day.  
• Auto download attachments: Enable or disable  
auto-download of files attached to recent messages when  
connected through Wi-Fi.  
• Account name: Enter a name to identify this account.  
Your name: Enter a name to be used on email.  
• Signature: Touch the  
Signature on or off. Touch Signature and enter a signature to  
add to email from this account.  
OFF / ON icon to turn  
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size.  
Options are: Headers only, 2, 50, or 100 KB, All, or All including  
attachments.  
• Default account: When enabled, email from your device is  
automatically sent from this account.  
• Always Cc/Bcc myself: Lets you manage whether your email  
address is included in the Cc or Bcc lines.  
• Auto resend times: Set the number of auto send times.  
Options are: No limit or 1, 3, 5, or 10 times.  
• Forward with files: Touch the check box to include any file  
attachments when you forward an email.  
Exchange ActiveSync settings  
• Period to sync email: Set whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1  
or 2 weeks, or 1 month of email on the tablet.  
• Recent messages: Limit the number of recent messages that  
are displayed on your device. Options are: 25, 50, 75, 100,  
200, or Total.  
• Empty server trash: If available, indicates whether to delete  
the contents in the server trash.  
• Show images: Display images in an email.  
Messaging  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Sync schedule: Set up your peak and off-peak schedule  
controls, which determines when your tablet checks the email  
service for new email.  
Server settings  
• Exchange server settings: Configure incoming server  
settings.  
• Out of office settings: Lets you set how email is handled for a  
defined period of time, while you are unable to check your  
email.  
– or –  
Incoming settings: Configure incoming server settings. For more  
• Outgoing settings: Configure outgoing server settings. For  
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size.  
Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5,10, 20, 50, or 100 KB,  
or All.  
• Period to sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your  
account are synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
• Security options: Set various security options for the account.  
• In case of sync conflict: Set whether to update the server or  
your tablet if there is a conflict of information between them.  
• Auto resend times: Set the number of auto send times.  
Options are: No limit or 1, 3, 5, or 10 times.  
• Sync Email: When enabled, email from your account is  
synchronized with your device’s email.  
• Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account  
are synchronized with your device’s Contacts.  
• Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
• Sync Task: When enabled, tasks from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s tasks.  
Notification settings  
• Email notifications: When enabled, the New Email icon  
appears in the Status Bar when a new email arrives.  
• Select ringtone: Choose a ringtone for email notifications for  
this account.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Incoming Server Settings  
Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port  
number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port  
number if your email service provider requires it.  
Your account’s exchange or incoming server settings are  
different, depending on the kind of email service for the  
account: POP3, IMAP, or Exchange ActiveSync.  
IMAP path prefix: Enter an IMAP path prefix, if required.  
Domain\ User name: If your Exchange ActiveSync server requires  
that you specify a domain, enter it before the backslash.  
Otherwise, just enter your username (the part before  
@emailprovider.com in your email address) after the backslash.  
The backslash is optional when only entering your username. The  
Email app enters the correct syntax for domains and usernames  
when communicating with the server.  
Outgoing Server Settings  
If you use an IMAP or POP3 account for receiving email, you  
typically use an SMTP server to send email from that  
account. Exchange ActiveSync accounts do not have  
separate outgoing server settings.  
SMTP server: The fully resolved domain name of your email  
service provider’s SMTP server, for example,  
Password: The password for your email account, which should be  
filled in.  
smtp.emprovider.com.  
Security type: Select the security type required by your email  
service provider. Select the SLL (Accept all certificates) option  
for your security type to accept a server certificate from your  
SMTP server that is self-signed, out of date, or in some other way  
not accepted by the Email application.  
Exchange server / IMAP server: The fully resolved domain name  
of your email service provider’s server, for example,  
mail.emailprovider.com.  
Use secure connection (SSL) / Security type: Check this option if  
your server requires you to connect to the server securely, or if  
you prefer to connect securely.  
Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port  
number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port  
number if your email service provider requires it.  
Use client certificate: Use a client certificate for messaging  
security.  
Messaging  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Require sign-in: Check this option to enter a username and  
password for your SMTP server, if your email service provider  
requires that you enter them to send email.  
Note: You can use more than one Google account on your  
device. To add another account, touch Menu  
Settings ADD ACCOUNT  
.
User name: Your username on the SMTP server (this may not be  
the same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for  
incoming mail). Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.  
Password: Your password on the SMTP server (this may not be the  
same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for incoming mail).  
Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
2. Touch Existing to sign in to an existing account.  
At the Sign in screen, use the on-screen keyboard to enter  
your Google Email name and Password, then touch Sign in  
.
Gmail  
– or –  
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
email.  
Touch New to create a new account.  
At the Your name screen, enter your first and last name, and  
touch Next  
Tip: To set up your Google account on your device, use  
.
At the Create email address screen follow the prompts to  
create a new account.  
The Backup and restore screen displays.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
3. Read the backup and restore information, touch the  
Setting Up Your Gmail Account  
If you did not set up a Google account during the initial  
configuration, the first time you launch Gmail, your device  
prompts you to set up your Google account.  
option to enable or disable it, and then touch Next  
.
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. The device communicates with the Google server to set  
up your account and synchronize your email. When  
complete, your Gmail displays in the Inbox.  
Managing Your Gmail Conversations  
In addition to managing your Gmail account, there are  
options for changing the status of one or more Gmail  
conversations in an account.  
Refreshing Your Gmail Account  
Refresh your account to update your device from the Gmail  
servers.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
2. Touch the gray box to the left of one or more  
conversations and then choose one of the following  
options:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail  
Gmail  
.
.
2. Touch Refresh in the Application Bar.  
• Archive  
conversations are assigned to the All Mail folder.  
• Delete : Delete the conversations. Deleted conversations  
are moved to the Trash folder.  
• Change labels : Relocate the conversations to the Inbox  
Personal Receipts Travel, or Work folder and then touch OK  
• Mark as Read Mark as Unread : Mark the  
: Archive the conversations. Archived  
Managing Your Gmail Account  
Use menu options to manage your Gmail account.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu for these options:  
• Manage labels: Determine settings for each label.  
Apps  
,
,
,
.
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
/
conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is  
marked as read, it has a gray background. Touch DONE to  
remove the check marks.  
• Send Feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
Tip: To move a conversation to another folder, touch and drag  
it to the folder tab.  
Messaging  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Touch  
• Add star  
Menu for these options:  
Remove star: Mark (or unmark) conversations with  
3. Touch the To field to enter recipients. As you enter  
names or email addresses, matching contacts display.  
Touch a contact to add it to the field.  
/
a yellow star. Starred conversations are listed in the Starred  
folder. Touch DONE to remove check marks.  
4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject.  
5. Touch Compose email to enter the text of your email.  
6. While composing a message, the following options are  
displayed:  
• Mark important  
importance indicator  
/
Mark not important: Change the  
. Yellow indicates important.  
• Mute: New messages added to muted conversations bypass  
your inbox so that the conversation stays archived in the All  
Mail folder.  
• + CC/BCC: Create Cc (copy) and Bcc (blind copy) fields in the  
message. After creating the fields, touch to enter recipients.  
• Report spam: Report the conversations as spam, which is  
email that violates the Gmail Program Policies and/or Terms of  
Use.  
Attach: Launch Gallery to select a photo to add to the  
message.  
7. Touch  
Menu for the following options:  
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to  
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to  
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
8. Touch SEND to send this message.  
– or –  
Composing and Sending Gmail  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
2. Touch  
Compose  
.
Touch  
Menu  
Save draft to save a draft of this  
message.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Priority Inbox: This setting is only available if you have  
configured Gmail on the web to show Priority Inbox. If available,  
you can set Priority Inbox as the conversation list to open when  
you have new mail, rather than Inbox.  
Gmail Account Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Settings for settings:  
General settings  
• Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email  
appear in the Status Bar.  
• Confirm before deleting: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm Delete actions.  
• Ringtone & vibrate: If Email notifications is enabled, touch this  
field to set the following options:  
• Confirm before archiving: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm archiving actions.  
Sync messages: Sync options are: None, Last 30 days, or All.  
Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email  
appear in the Status Bar.  
• Confirm before sending: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm Send actions.  
• Auto-advance: Choose a screen to show after you delete or  
archive a conversation.  
Ringtone: Choose a ringtone for new email notifications or use  
the default ringtone and then touch OK  
.
• Message text size: Set the size of text in message displays.  
• Clear search history: Remove previous searches you  
performed.  
Notify once: When enabled, a notification appears in the Status  
Bar for new email, not for every new message.  
• Signature: Create a text signature to add to outgoing  
messages.  
• Hide pictures in messages: Stops pictures from displaying  
automatically in messages until you allow it for a sender.  
(Gmail account settings)  
• Gmail sync is ON/OFF: Indicates whether you have Gmail  
synchronization turned on for this account in the Account and  
sync settings. Touch to open those settings.  
Each account has independent settings:  
Messaging  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Days of mail to sync: Set the number days to sync email for  
this Gmail account.  
Open Talk and Sign In  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Talk.  
• Manage labels: Choose which labels are synchronized.  
• Download attachments: Enable or disable auto-download of  
files attached to recent messages when connected through  
Wi-Fi.  
If you are not signed in to a Google account, the Add a  
Google Account screen displays.  
2. Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account,  
or New to create a Google account.  
About Gmail  
Displays information about the Gmail (Version, copyright  
information, Send feedback, Report a problem, Open source  
licenses, Privacy Policy).  
Note: If you have already set up your Google account, you are  
automatically logged in. Just touch the account.  
Google Talk  
Talk is Google’s instant messaging and audio and video chat  
service. You can use it to communicate, in real time, with  
other people who also use Google Talk on another Android  
tablet or phone or on a computer.  
Once sign in is complete, the Talk main screen  
displays.  
Tip: Talk requires that you have a Google account. To set up  
your Google account on your device use Accounts and  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Touch Accept, if you want to accept the invitation and  
chat, Decline, if you do not want to chat with and share  
your Google Talk status with the sender right now, or  
Block, if you do not want to receive any more  
invitations from that person.  
Invite a Friend to Chat  
You can invite anyone with a Google Account to become your  
friend in Google Talk, so you can chat with each other and  
view each other’s online status.  
1. While viewing your Friends list, touch  
Add friend.  
2. Enter your friend’s address and touch DONE  
.
If you touch Accept, the friend is added to your Friends  
list in Talk and you can share your status in Talk and  
other applications.  
Your friend’s address in Talk is a Gmail or other email  
address that is configured to connect to Google Talk.  
Talk Options  
There are several options that are available while viewing  
your Friends list and some that are only available while you  
are chatting.  
If your friend accepts your invitation, they are added to  
your Friends list in Talk and you can share each others  
status in Talk and other applications.  
View and Accept an Invitation to Become a  
Friend  
1. Touch  
to search your Talk messages or the current  
message for a word. Use the on-screen keyboard to  
enter a search term. Touch  
search your Talk messages.  
When a contact invites you to become a friend in Google Talk,  
on the keyboard to  
you receive a  
notification in the System Bar and the  
invitation displays in your Friends list.  
1. Touch the invitation.  
2. Touch  
to invite another friend to chat,  
to  
invite a friend to video chat, or  
voice chat.  
to invite a friend to  
Messaging  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Touch a Friend’s entry to display the Chat entries for  
Note: If you touch the REMOVE option, touch  
Add friend  
that Friend.  
Send chat invitation to, to make the Friend visible again.  
4. Touch  
Menu to display the following options,  
which are available while viewing your Friends list and  
some that are only available while you are chatting.  
• Display options: To set the way your friends list is sorted,  
• Add to chat: Choose another friend to invite to this  
conversation.  
• Clear chat history: Remove the history of this chat from your  
device.  
touch Availability Name, or Recency.  
,
• End all chats: End all chats in which you are engaged.  
• Sign out: Sign out of Google Talk and display the Talk main  
screen.  
• Settings: Offers various settings for Google talk. For more  
• Help: Displays additional help information.  
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
• End chat: End this chat session.  
• Go off the record/Stop chatting off the record: Set whether  
you want to stop saving your chat to the chat history.  
• Friend info: Display information about the friend with which  
you are chatting. The following options are also displayed:  
Google Talk Settings  
Use Google Talk Settings to configure your Talk account. If  
you have more than one account, each maintains its own  
Talk settings.  
BLOCK: Keeps this person from sending you messages and  
removes the person from your Friends list.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Talk.  
REMOVE: Remove the friend as if you never accepted their  
invitation. However, the friend is not blocked.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Touch  
options:  
GENERAL  
Menu  
Settings, then touch an account for  
VOICE & VIDEO CHAT  
• Video chat notifications: Set whether to open a dialog or  
display a notification in the System Bar when you are invited to  
a video chat.  
• Mobile indicator: Check and your friends see an outline of an  
android next to your name in their Friends list when you are  
signed into Google Talk on a tablet or phone.  
• Away when screen off: Check to change your Talk status to  
Away when your screen turns off. When unchecked, your  
status is not changed.  
• Video chat ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when  
you receive an invitation to a video chat.  
• Default video effect: Set the video image stabilization.  
ACCOUNT  
• Blocked friends: Displays a list of friends you have blocked.  
Touch a blocked friend and then touch OK to unblock the  
friend.  
• Invitation notifications: Show notification when a friend  
invitation arrives.  
CHAT NOTIFICATIONS  
• Clear search history: Erases your search history. No previous  
searches are shown until you search for new words.  
• Manage account: Opens the Accounts and sync settings. For  
• IM notifications: Set whether to open a dialog, display a  
notification in the System Bar, or neither, when you receive a  
text chat.  
• Notification ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when  
you receive a text chat.  
ABOUT  
Terms & privacy: Displays the Google Talk terms of use and  
privacy policies.  
Messaging  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Google+  
Messages  
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail  
messages together into a single conversation thread and is  
accessible by phone or computer.  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Messages  
Apps  
.
2. Sign in to your Google account if you are not already  
1. Sign in to your Google account. For more information,  
2. From a Home screen, touch  
Google+  
Apps  
.
Note: The first time you use the Messages app, download the  
updated application from the Play Store. When the Play  
3. Select the account to use to sign in to Google+.  
Store page displays, touch Update  
Accept & Update  
– or –  
Touch Add account to create another account.  
The Enrich your contacts screen displays.  
3. At the Welcome screen, read the information and tap  
Continue or tap Learn More to receive more  
information.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.  
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.  
The Sign in to AT&T Messages screen displays.  
4. Touch Register Now to register for you MEdia ID, if you  
need one.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. Enter your ID and Password and touch Sign In  
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
Google+.  
– or –  
6. The first time you use Messages, you will need to set  
up a few things. Touch Record Greeting to record a  
personal greeting or tap Skip if you want to do it later.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Messages  
application.  
Touch Add account to create another account.  
The Enrich your contacts screen displays.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Messenger.  
Messenger  
Note: Uploading over a mobile network uses a data connection  
With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends  
together into a simple group conversation, putting everyone  
on the same page. When you get a new conversation in  
Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your tablet.  
and charges may apply.  
5. Touch  
Menu  
Help and then touch a topic to  
learn more about using Google Messenger.  
To get started, touch the Messenger icon on the home screen  
of the Google+ app or use the Messenger icon on your  
Applications screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Messenger  
The Messenger screen displays.  
Apps  
.
2. Sign in to your Google account if you are not already  
Messaging  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Section 6: Multimedia  
This section describes the various multimedia applications  
available on your device such as Media Hub, Music Player,  
Google Play Music, Video Player, Play Movies & TV, Gallery,  
Camera, Camcorder, and Photo Editor.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Media Hub  
Apps  
.
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA), touch  
I agree to the Terms and Conditions, and then touch  
Accept to continue or Decline to exit.  
The Media Hub screen displays.  
Media Hub  
3. To rent or buy media, you must have a Samsung  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your  
fingertips, entertaining on the go has never been easier. You  
can rent or purchase your favorite content and conveniently  
watch anywhere. Featuring the stunning viewing quality  
Samsung is known for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway  
to mobile video like you have never experienced it before.  
account. Touch  
Menu  
My Profile to sign in to  
your Samsung account or to create an account. Follow  
the prompts to complete log-in.  
4. Browse content using these options:  
• What’s new: Recently-added titles for rent or purchase.  
• Movies: Movies you can rent or purchase.  
• TV Shows: TV shows you can rent or purchase.  
• My Media: Content you have previously purchased or rented.  
Note: Media Hub service requires a Samsung account and  
depends on service availability.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. When you find media you want to view, use these  
options:  
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you  
have acquired through the Service.  
• View trailer: View a short clip from the movie or show.  
• Buy: Purchase the media for unlimited viewing on your device.  
Follow the prompts to enter payment details.  
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download  
Media Content.  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account.  
• Rent: Purchase a time-limited download of the media. Follow  
the prompts to enter payment details.  
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.  
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
6. For additional information about Media Hub, touch  
Menu  
Help.  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as  
a) license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the  
Media Content has been buffered.  
Media Hub Notices  
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after  
you create an account in Media Hub.  
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24  
consecutive hours of start of playback.  
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on  
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to  
the same account.  
Stopping, pausing, or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more  
than once every 90 days.  
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as  
you like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media  
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download  
availability and studio permissions.  
Multimedia  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period  
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)  
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin  
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental  
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented  
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four  
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the  
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).  
2. Touch Songs  
,
Playlists  
,
Albums  
,
Artists  
,
Genres  
,
Folders  
,
Composers Years, or Music square to change the way  
,
you view the contents of your library.  
3. Touch the Music application icon  
at the top-left of  
the Application bar to return to the previous Music  
screen.  
Managing Your Music  
Searching for Music  
To find music in your library:  
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub  
through any output on your mobile device, including All Share.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player  
Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from  
your computer.  
Music Player  
.
2. Touch  
Search  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
3. Type the name of an artist, album, or song.  
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search  
box.  
.
The Music Player application searches your device’s  
internal storage for music and playlists. This can take  
from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on  
the amount of new music added since you last opened  
the application. It then displays your music in several  
ways.  
4. Touch a matching song to play it. Touch a matching  
album, or artist to view a list of its songs.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Creating a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch  
and touch a playlist.  
Apps  
– or –  
Music Player  
Playlists.  
Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch  
Add music  
All songs are displayed.  
3. Touch next to each song you want to add or next to  
2. Touch  
New playlist.  
.
3. Touch the name field to enter a name for the playlist.  
4. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
Renaming a Playlist  
Add all to add all songs to the playlist.  
The songs appear under the playlist to the right of the  
songs list.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
2. Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch  
Menu Rename playlist  
Apps  
.
4. Touch Done to save the playlist.  
.
Removing Songs from Playlists  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
3. Touch the name field to enter a new name for the  
playlist.  
Apps  
Music Player  
.
4. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
Adding Songs to Playlists  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch  
and touch a playlist.  
All songs are displayed to the left of the playlist and the  
songs in the playlist are displayed on the right, under  
the playlist name.  
Apps  
Music Player  
.
3. Touch  
to remove a song from the playlist.  
4. Touch Done to save the playlist.  
Multimedia  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Order of a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
4. Touch the box next to a playlist title. A check mark  
indicates the playlist is to be deleted.  
5. Touch Remove and then touch OK to delete the selected  
playlist.  
Apps  
Music Player  
2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist.  
3. Touch Reorder to change the order of the songs.  
Touch the grid on an entry and drag the entry to a  
.
Changing Music Settings  
To change settings in the Music application:  
new position in the list.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
4. Touch Done to change the order and save the playlist.  
Playing a Playlist  
Music Player  
.
2. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
2. Display the Playlists library view.  
3. Touch Favorites Most played, or Recently added, or  
Apps  
• Delete: Touch the box for any song or album you want to delete  
or touch the box for Select all to select every song or album. A  
check mark  
.
indicates the song or album is to be deleted.  
Touch Delete to delete the selected items.  
,
• Share via: Share your music by using Group Cast, Bluetooth,  
Wi-Fi Direct, Gmail, or Email. Select the songs you want to  
touch a playlist title that you created.  
4. Touch a song to start playing the playlist at that song.  
Deleting a Playlist  
share and touch Share  
.
• Set as alarm tone: Choose a song and touch Set to use the  
song as an alarm tone.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist.  
Apps  
.
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
3. Touch  
Delete in the Application bar.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Settings: The following settings display:  
Playing Music  
To play a song:  
Advanced  
Sound settings: Choose SoundAlive and Play speed  
settings.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player.  
Lyrics: Display the lyrics of the song, if available.  
Music auto off: Set the option Off or set your music to turn off  
automatically after 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 1 hour and  
30 minutes, or 2 hours.  
2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it.  
– or –  
While viewing a list of albums or genres, touch the  
album thumbnail and then touch a song in the list of  
songs on the album.  
Music menu  
Music menu: Enable or disable the music display options that  
The song you touch starts to play. The tracks in the  
current list play in order until you reach the end of the  
list (unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise,  
playback stops only if you stop it, even when you  
switch applications.  
appear on the main music screen. A check mark  
an option means that it is enabled.  
next to  
Listening to Music  
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in  
speakers, through a wired headset or through a wireless  
Bluetooth stereo headset.  
Touch the Volume Key  
on the side of the  
device to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and  
drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press the  
Volume Key to adjust playback volume.  
Multimedia  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Touch the music player to enlarge it and touch the  
Accessing the Music Player  
If you navigate away from the Music Player application and  
music is playing, you can change songs or easily return to  
the Music Player:  
screen to display the sound and playlist controls.  
Artist /  
Album  
List  
Mode  
SoundAlive  
Song Title  
Favorite  
Volume  
Info  
1. Touch the Music notification icon  
in the System  
Bar.  
2. In the Status Details, touch the song title to display the  
Music Player. You can also pause and resume playback  
and skip to the next or previous song in the panel. For  
Using the Music Player  
Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from  
your computer.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
.
2. Touch a song or playlist to begin playback.  
The music player displays below (portrait mode) or to  
the right (landscape mode) of the music listing.  
Playback Controls  
Repeat  
Time  
Indicators  
Progress  
Bar  
Shuffle  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. During playback, use the sound and playlist controls:  
• Repeat: Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or  
• Favorite: Touch the star  
to mark the current song as a  
disable repeat mode.  
favorite.  
Options While Playing a Song  
There are various options and controls available while a song  
is playing:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
• Volume: Touch to toggle Silent mode and Sound mode, then  
touch and drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press  
the Volume Key on the side of the device to adjust playback  
volume.  
Apps  
Music Player, touch a song or an album, and  
• SoundAlive: Touch to view and set SoundAlive options.  
• Info: Touch to view information about the current song.  
• List Mode: Touch to switch to the list of songs.  
• Shuffle: When enabled, songs play in random order. When  
disabled, songs play in the order they appear in List view.  
• Progress Bar: Touch and drag the end of the progress bar to  
scan forward or backward through the current song.  
• Playback Controls: These buttons control the playback of  
songs:  
then a song.  
2. Touch the music player to enlarge it.  
3. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing  
playlist.  
• Via Bluetooth: Play the current song by using a Bluetooth  
device.  
• Share via: Share the current song by using Group Cast,  
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Gmail, or Email.  
• Set as alarm tone: Use the current song as an alarm tone.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
Touch  
to advance to the next song. Touch and hold  
to  
scan forward through the current song.  
Touch  
Touch  
to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold  
to scan backward through the current song.  
• Settings: Displays Music Player settings. For more information,  
to pause playback. Touch  
to resume playback.  
Multimedia  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent  
music, organized by album.  
Play Music App  
The Play Music app contains a music player that plays music  
and other audio files that you copy from your computer or store  
online.  
Note: Some options described in this manual may not be  
available until you sign in to your Google account.  
Google Play Music  
Google PlayTM Music is a new service from Google that gives  
you instant access to your personal music collection on the  
hassle of wires or syncing. For more information, visit  
2. Swipe left or right to spin the carousel and browse  
through your new and recent music.  
music.google.com  
.
Accessing the Music App  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
3. Touch an album to open it.  
Apps  
4. Return to the Library screen from most other screens  
in the Music application by touching the Music  
Play Music.  
The Play Music app searches your online library and  
your device’s internal storage for music and playlists.  
This can take from a few seconds to several minutes,  
depending on the amount of new music added since  
you last opened the application.  
application icon  
bar.  
at the top-left of the Application  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.  
Touch on the keyboard to remove the keyboard.  
Changing Library View  
You can change the way you view the contents of your  
library.  
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search  
box.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
4. Touch a matching song to play it, touch a matching  
2. Touch the name of the current view, such as Recent  
,
album, artist, or playlist to view a list of its songs, or  
near the top-left of the Application bar.  
touch  
next to an item in the list to play it, add it to  
3. Touch an option to set how you view your library.  
a play queue, add it to a playlist, or shop for other  
music by the artist online.  
The choices are: Recent  
,
Albums, Artists, Songs,  
Playlists, or Genres  
.
Changing Music Settings  
To change settings in the Music application:  
Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid,  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
list, or carousel, depending on the view.  
Play Music  
.
2. Touch  
Menu  
.
Searching for Music  
The following options display depending on the library  
view:  
To find music in your library:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music  
.
• Shuffle all: Play all songs in a random order.  
• New playlist: Create a new playlist from the Playlist view. For  
2. Touch  
Search  
.
Multimedia  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Hide now playing bar / Show now playing bar: Hide or show  
the Now Playing bar that displays at the bottom of the screen.  
You can return to the Now playing screen from other Music  
screens by touching the name of the current song in the Now  
Playing bar.  
• Help: Opens the Browser with information about the Music  
application.  
Listening to Music  
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in  
speakers, through a wired headset, or through a wireless  
• Choose on-device music: In addition to playing the music that  
you add to your online library, you can play music stored on  
your device’s internal storage. Then you can listen to music  
when you have no Internet connection. To do this, make some  
of your online music available offline. For more information,  
Touch the Volume Key  
on the side of the  
device to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and  
drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press the  
Volume Key to adjust playback volume.  
Options While Selecting a Song  
• On device only: Display only the music that is available on your  
tablet.  
The following options are available for playing songs,  
albums, or playlist, finding more information about artists,  
finding more music, and deleting songs:  
• Hide labels / Show labels: Hide or show labels. This option is  
not available in all library views.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
2. Touch an album or song.  
Apps  
.
• Settings: Displays the Settings screen. Choose a Google  
account to use to connect to Google PlayTM Music and set the  
Music settings as indicated on the screen. The Music app  
version is also displayed.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Touch the label area  
under an item.  
2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it.  
– or –  
The following options display depending on the item  
view:  
While viewing a list of songs, touch  
and touch Play  
next to a song  
.
• Play: Plays the selected song, album, or playlist.  
• Add to queue / Remove from queue: Add the song to or  
remove the song from a queue of songs to be played.  
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing  
playlist.  
– or –  
While viewing a list of albums, artists, playlists, or  
genres, the label area  
Play  
under an item and touch  
.
• More by artist: View any other music in your library by the  
artist that performs this song.  
The Now playing bar displays at the bottom of the  
screen and the song you touched or the first song in  
the album or playlist starts to play. The tracks in the  
current list play in order until you reach the end of the  
list (unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise,  
playback stops only if you stop it, even when you  
switch applications.  
• Shop for artist: Launches Google to search for more songs by  
the selected artist.  
• Delete: Delete the song.  
Playing Music  
To play a song:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the  
Music application, the Now Playing bar displays at the  
bottom of the screen. You can use this to control  
Play Music.  
playback or touch  
Menu  
Hide now playing bar.  
Multimedia  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Displaying the Now Playing Screen  
Touch the Now playing bar to display the Now playing  
screen. If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to  
return to the Now playing screen from other Music screens:  
The Now playing bar displays.  
3. Touch the Now playing bar.  
Touch the name of the current song in the Now Playing  
The Now playing screen displays.  
bar.  
– or –  
4. Touch  
on the Now playing screen to display all  
songs in the queue to be played.  
Touch the Music notification icon  
in the System  
5. Touch  
next to a song to add it to a playlist, remove  
Bar, and in the Status Details panel, touch the song  
title.  
it from the queue, view information about the artist  
associated with this song, shop for the artist, or delete  
the song.  
You can also pause and resume playback and skip to  
the next or previous song in the Status Details panel.  
6. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Clear queue: Remove all songs from the play queue.  
• Save queue: Create a playlist of the songs currently in the play  
queue.  
Options While Playing a Song  
When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays.  
There are various options and controls available while a song  
is playing:  
• Settings: Displays the Settings screen. Choose a Google  
account to use to connect to Google PlayTM Music and set the  
Music settings as indicated on the screen. The Music app  
version is also displayed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
• Help: View online help from Google.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Touch the Now playing screen to display the following  
buttons that you can use to control the playback of  
songs, albums, and playlists:  
Creating a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music  
2. Touch the Playlists library view.  
3. Touch Menu New playlist  
The New playlist pop-up displays.  
.
Touch Thumbs up or Thumbs down to add the  
song to a Thumbs up or Thumbs down playlist.  
.
Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all  
songs, or disable repeat mode.  
4. Touch the NAME field to enter a name for the playlist.  
5. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
Touch to go back to the previous song. Touch  
and hold to scan backward through the current  
song.  
Adding Songs To a Playlist  
To add a song to a new or existing playlist while the song is  
playing:  
Touch to pause playback.  
Touch to resume playback  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music  
.
2. Touch  
next to an album or song.  
3. Touch Add to playlist  
.
The Add to playlist pop-up displays.  
Touch to advance to the next song. Touch and  
hold to scan forward through the current song.  
When Shuffle mode is enabled, songs play in  
randomorder.Whendisabled,songsplayinthe  
order they appear in List view.  
Multimedia  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Touch the New playlist field to enter a name for the  
Shopping for Music at the Play Store  
To visit the Google PlayTM Store where you can find and buy  
playlist.  
– or –  
music  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Music  
:
Play Store  
.
Touch the playlist to which you want to add the song.  
The playlist is saved with the song added to it.  
.
The Google Play Store music section displays.  
Playing, Renaming, or Deleting a Playlist  
To play, rename, or delete a playlist:  
To view information about finding and buying music:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
2. Display the Playlists library view.  
3. Touch next to a playlist title.  
Apps  
Play Music  
.
.
2. Touch  
Menu Help.  
3. Touch Music  
.
Making Online Music Available Offline  
The following options display:  
In addition to playing the music that you add to your online  
library, you can play music stored on your device’s internal  
storage. Then you can listen to music when you have no  
Internet connection. To do this, make some of your online  
music available offline.  
• Play: Play the songs in the playlist.  
• Add to queue: Add the songs in the playlist to the play queue.  
• Rename: Use the keyboard to enter a new name for the  
playlist.  
• Delete: Touch OK to delete the playlist. Only the playlist is  
deleted. To delete individual songs, see “Options While  
Tip: You can also copy music directly from your computer to  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To make your online music available offline on your device:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Play Music  
4. Touch the gray pin next to each item you want to make  
available offline.  
– or –  
.
2. Change your library view to Albums, Artists, or  
Touch a white pin to stop making it available offline.  
You can switch to other views of your library to make  
other kinds of items available offline as well.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Choose on-device music and touch  
5. Touch Done in the bar at the bottom of the screen.  
The Music application starts downloading the items to  
your device.  
the album or playlist you want to make available  
offline.  
A white pin  
offline.  
indicates that the item is already available  
Video Player  
Your device’s 10.1-inch 1280x800 WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD  
screen provides playback of videos. Use Video Player to view  
and manage videos stored on your tablet.  
Gray pins appear next to the items you can make available  
offline.  
A bar at the bottom of the screen shows how much space is  
available on your device for music and other files.  
Dim blue pins indicate songs or albums that you copied directly  
from a computer to your device.  
Tip: Video Player displays by default as a Primary shortcut on a  
Home screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Video Player.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Video Player.  
Multimedia  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Touch the Thumbnails  
3. Touch Search and use the keyboard to enter a  
search term. The current folder is searched and results  
are displayed. Touch to remove the search field.  
4. While viewing the list, touch Menu for options:  
,
List, or Folders tab.  
6. Touch the icon in the upper left corner of the display  
screen while the video is playing to change the Display  
Mode from original size to full screen in ratio or full  
screen.  
X
• Original Size  
(
): Changes the display mode to the original  
size.  
• List by: Display videos by Name (default), Date, Size, or Type.  
• Share via: Share the video with Google+, Bluetooth,  
Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube, Gmail, or Email.  
• Full-Screen in Ratio View  
(
): Changes the display mode  
to the full-screen in ratio option. The video is enlarged as much  
as possible without becoming distorted.  
• Delete: Touch videos to select them for deletion or touch  
Select all to delete all videos. Touch Delete to deleted the  
selected videos.  
• Full-Screen View  
(
): Changes the display mode to full  
screen. That is, the entire screen is used, which may cause  
some minor distortion.  
• Auto play next: Touch to enable or disable automatic playing of  
videos in the order they appear.  
7. Touch  
Normal, Voice, Movie, or Virtual 7.1 ch.  
8. While the video is playing, touch Bookmark to  
SoundAlive to set the sound quality to  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
mark your favorite areas of the video. A yellow mark  
displays on the progress bar.  
5. Touch a video to play it. While playing a video, touch  
the screen to display or hide on-screen playback  
controls.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. During playback, press  
Menu for options:  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
• Share via: Send the video by Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct,  
YouTube, Gmail, or Email.  
• Settings: Touch this option to view the following:  
• Chapter preview: If chapter information is recorded in the  
video file, display the chapters. Touch a chapter to begin  
playing the video at that point.  
Play speed: Touch and drag the slider to decrease or increase  
play speed.  
Subtitles: View subtitles for the video, if available.  
Auto play next: Enable or disable auto play of the next video.  
Trim: Trim the original video or trim the video and create a new  
video.  
• Via Bluetooth: Turn Bluetooth on to use Bluetooth services.  
• Video Maker: Open this video in the Video Maker app. For  
• Bookmarks: If bookmarks have been set for this video, a  
thumbnail and time are displayed for each bookmark. Touch  
to remove a bookmark.  
Play Movies & TV  
The Play Movies & TV app is available for select Android  
devices. Any movie you rent from the Google Play™ Store  
can be downloaded for offline viewing through this  
application. In addition, the Play Movies & TV app can be  
used to stream your Google Play™ movie rentals as well as  
play any of your personal videos stored on your tablet.  
• Details: Provides details about the video, such as Name, Size,  
Resolution, Duration, Format, and Date modified.  
• Time set for auto video off: Automatically turn off the video.  
Options are: Off, After playing, After 15 min, After 30 min,  
After 1 hour, After 1 hour 30 min, or After 2 hours.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Movies & TV  
2. For more information touch  
Apps  
.
Menu  
Help.  
Multimedia  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
Gallery  
• Select album / Select group: Touch one or more albums or  
groups that you want to share, stream to another device, or  
delete.  
Your device’s 10.1-inch 1280x800 WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD screen  
provides a high-resolution display of photos and videos.  
Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
Selecting Photos and Videos to View  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Gallery.  
Viewing Groups of Photos and Videos  
– or –  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Gallery.  
From a Home screen, touch  
All albums display.  
Apps  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it.  
Thumbnails for each photo and video in the group  
display.  
2. Touch Albums to display other ways to group your  
photos and videos. Options are:  
3. Touch  
Slideshow to view a slideshow of the  
• Albums: Based on the folder in which they are stored.  
• Locations: Based on where taken.  
available pictures and videos.  
4. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
• Time: Based on the time taken.  
• Select item: Touch one or more items that you want to share,  
stream to another device, or delete.  
3. Touch  
Camera to launch the Camera app.  
• Group by: Further group this group by Location, Time, Person,  
or Group, depending on the way you chose the group.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Touch  
Slideshow to view a slideshow of photos  
Viewing Photos and Videos  
and video thumbnails in the group. Touch the screen to  
stop the slideshow and view the photo or video being  
displayed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
touch a photo or video thumbnail.  
8. To delete the photo or video being displayed, touch  
Delete and then touch OK to delete the item or Cancel to  
exit.  
3. Touch the screen to show or hide Gallery options.  
4. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the  
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more  
9. Touch  
Menu to display the following options for  
photos:  
5. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous photo or video. (Videos are indicated by the  
Play button.) The current photo or video is  
outlined in the thumbnails at the bottom of the screen.  
Touch a thumbnail to view the photo or video it  
represents.  
• Copy to clipboard: Copy the current photo to the clipboard.  
• Rotateleft: Allows you to rotate the photo counterclockwise 90  
degrees.  
• Rotate right: Allows you to rotate the photo clockwise 90  
degrees.  
• Crop: Allows you to crop the image. Touch and drag the crop  
box or the sides or corners of the crop box to create the crop  
6. Touch  
Share to use Group Cast (photos), Picasa  
(photos), Photo editor (photos), Google+, Bluetooth,  
Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube (videos), Gmail, or Email to share  
the photo or video.  
area, then touch Done. Touch to stop without cropping the  
X
photo.  
• Edit: Use Photo studio or Video Maker to edit your photo or  
video.  
Multimedia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
     
• Set as: Assign the photo as a Contact photo, Home screen,  
Lock Screen, or Home and lock screens.  
There is only two options for videos that are not  
playing:  
• Print: Print the current photo to a Samsung printer.  
• Show on map: This option displays if a Location exists for the  
photo. A Location is added to the photo if GPS tag is set On in  
the Camera settings. Touch this option to open the Map app  
and display the Location where the photo was taken. For more  
• Rename: Enter an new file name.  
• Details: Provides details about the video such as Title, Time,  
Duration, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close to close the  
pop-up.  
For menu options while a video is playing and other  
Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a  
Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera  
photo when posting your photos on the Internet.  
• Rename: Enter an new file name.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
10. Press  
Back to return to the category screen.  
Setting a Picture As  
You can use the photos you take as a contact’s photo or as  
wallpaper for the Home or Lock screen:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
• Details: Provides details about the photo such as Title, Time,  
Location, Width, Height, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close  
to close the pop-up.  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera  
touch a photo to select it.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Set as.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Touch Contact photo and then touch a contact entry.  
Playing Videos  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Gallery.  
Touch Home and lock screens  
or Lock screen wallpaper  
The Crop picture screen displays.  
,
Home screen wallpaper  
,
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
.
touch a video thumbnail to play the video.  
Note: Videos are marked with a  
Play button.  
5. Touch and drag the crop box or the sides or corners of  
the crop box to create the crop area, then touch Done  
to save the cropped photo as the contact’s icon or  
wallpaper. Touch Cancel to stop without cropping the  
photo.  
3. Touch  
Pause to pause the video.  
4. Touch  
Resume to resume playing the video.  
5. Touch and drag the  
white dot on the progress  
bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left  
end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the  
right end of the progress bar to end the video playback.  
– or –  
Touch  
Rewind to restart the video or  
Tip: To change wallpaper, see “Wallpapers” on page 36.  
Fast Forward to end the video.  
Multimedia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
 
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Camera.  
Sharing Photos and Videos  
Share photos and videos with your friends.  
– or –  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Gallery  
.
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Camera.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to display  
If a memory card is inserted, the Storage setting  
pop-up displays.  
thumbnails.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Select item.  
2. Touch OK to change the storage setting to memory  
4. Touch one or more photos and videos to highlight them  
card.  
– or –  
for sharing.  
5. Touch  
6. Touch Group Cast (photos only), Picasa (photos only),  
Photo editor (photos only), Google+ Bluetooth  
Wi-Fi Direct YouTube (videos only), Gmail, or Email  
then follow the prompts.  
Share.  
Touch Cancel to use the device storage for storing  
pictures and videos.  
,
,
,
,
Note: If memory card storage is used, photos are stored in the  
/Root/extSdCard/DCIM/Camera folder as jpg files. For  
Camera  
Use your device’s built-in camera and camcorder to take  
photos and record videos.  
Tip: Camera displays by default as a Primary shortcut on the  
Home screen.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Camera screen displays.  
3. To take the photo, touch the Camera button.  
4. Touch Back to leave the Camera and display the  
previous screen.  
GPS  
Active  
Storage  
Indicator  
Settings  
Shortcuts  
Important! Do not take photos of people without their  
permission.  
Mode  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
Camera  
Camera Settings  
Image  
Viewer  
Before you start taking photos, use the camera settings to  
configure the camera for best results. Camera settings are  
represented by icons on the left side of the screen.  
Editing Camera Settings Shortcuts  
Settings  
Taking Photos  
To take a photo:  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
The first five icons are actually shortcuts to camera settings.  
These five shortcuts can be customized to fit your  
preference.  
Camera.  
2. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your  
picture by aiming the lens at the subject.  
Self-portrait  
,
Shooting mode  
,
Timer,  
Effects, and  
Exposure value are default settings  
shortcuts.  
Multimedia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
     
To customize these shortcuts:  
• Shooting mode: Choose an automatic shooting mode, from:  
1. Touch  
Settings  
Edit shortcuts.  
Single shot: Take a single photo.  
– or –  
Smile shot: Touch the Camera button to automatically focus on  
the subject’s face and take the photo.  
Touch and hold any of the shortcut icons to edit them.  
Panorama: Touch the Camera button to take a photo, then use  
the on-screen guideline to move the viewfinder and take the  
next 7 shots automatically.  
2. Touch and hold a setting, then drag and drop it on one  
of the five settings shortcuts to the left. The replaced  
setting shortcut displays in the edit list.  
• Scene mode: Choose an automatic scene mode from None,  
Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow, Sunset,  
Dawn, Fall Color, Firework, Candlelight, or Backlight.  
• Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from  
-2.0 to +2.0.  
Configuring Camera Settings  
To configure Camera settings:  
While in Camera mode, touch a settings shortcut or  
touch  
Settings to configure the following camera  
settings:  
• Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before taking a photo.  
Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.  
• Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more  
• Effects: Apply an effect to photos. Options are: No effect,  
Negative, Black and white, or Sepia.  
• Self-portrait: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera lens  
and take a photo of yourself.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Resolution: Set a size for the image. Options are: 3.2M  
(2048x1536), w2.4M (2048x1152), 2M (1600X1200),  
w1.3M (1536x864), 1.3M (1280x960), w0.9M (1280x720),  
or 0.3M (640x480).  
Viewing Photos with the Image Viewer  
After taking a photo, use the Image Viewer to view, share,  
delete, or edit photos.  
1. Touch Image Viewer to view the photo.  
• White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto,  
Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
• Metering: Set how the camera measures or meters the light  
source: Center-weighted, Spot, or Matrix.  
2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer  
options.  
3. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the  
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more  
4. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous photo. The current photo is outlined in the  
thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a  
thumbnail to view the photo it represents.  
• Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in photo  
composition.  
• GPS tag: Enable or disable tagging of photos with your GPS  
location.  
displays on the screen when this option is active.  
Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a  
5. Touch  
Share to use Group Cast, Picasa, Photo  
photo when posting your photos on the Internet.  
editor, Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Gmail, or  
Email to share the photo.  
• Shutter sound: Enable or disable a shutter sound when  
you take a photo. Options are: Off or On.  
• Storage: Set whether to store photos on your device or on your  
memory card.  
6. Touch  
available pictures and videos.  
7. To delete the photo being displayed, touch  
and then touch OK to delete the photo or Cancel to exit.  
Slideshow to display a slide show of the  
Delete  
• Reset: Reset all Camera settings to the defaults. Touch OK  
.
Multimedia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
8. Touch  
Menu to select Set picture as to assign the  
Settings  
Shortcuts  
Current or  
Elapsed Time  
Storage  
Indicator  
photo as a Contact photo, Home and lock screens,  
Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.  
Mode  
Record  
Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera  
Image  
Viewer  
9. Press  
photos.  
Back to return to the Camera to take more  
Settings  
File Size  
Available  
Storage  
Camcorder  
Use your device’s built-in Camcorder to record high-  
definition video in 1080p resolution.  
Recording Videos  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Camera  
.
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Camera  
.
2. Slide the  
Mode button to the Camcorder  
2. Slide the  
Mode button to the Camcorder  
setting.  
setting.  
3. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your shot  
by aiming the lens at the subject.  
The Camcorder screen displays.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. To start recording, touch  
Record  
.
Editing Camcorder Settings Shortcuts  
During recording, a white square appears on the  
Record button.  
As with the camera, the first five icons are actually shortcuts  
to camcorder settings. These five shortcuts can be  
customized to fit your preference.  
5. Touch  
6. Touch  
Record to stop recording.  
Self-recording  
,
Recording mode  
,
Timer,  
Back to leave the Camcorder and display  
Effects, and  
Exposure value are default settings  
the previous screen.  
shortcuts.  
Important! Do not take videos of people without their  
permission.  
Do not take videos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take videos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
Configuring Camcorder Settings  
To configure Camcorder settings:  
While in Camcorder mode, touch a settings shortcut or  
touch Settings to configure the following  
Camcorder settings:  
Camcorder Settings  
• Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more  
Before you start taking videos, use the camcorder settings to  
configure the camcorder for best results. Camcorder settings  
are represented by icons on the left side of the screen.  
• Self-recording: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera  
lens and record a video of yourself.  
Multimedia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
 
• Recording mode: Set a recording mode. Options are: Normal  
and Limit for email, which limits the size of the video to 50  
megabytes.  
Viewing Videos with the Image Viewer  
After recording a video, use the Image Viewer to play, share,  
or delete your video.  
• Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from  
-2.0 to +2.0.  
1. Touch Image Viewer to view the video.  
2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer  
options.  
• Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before recording a  
video. Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.  
• Effects: Apply an effect to videos. Options are: No effect,  
Negative, Black and white, or Sepia.  
3. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous video. The current video is outlined in the  
thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a  
thumbnail to view the video it represents.  
• Resolution: Set a size for the video. Options are: 1280x720,  
720x480, 640x480, or 320x240.  
4. Touch  
Direct, YouTube, Gmail, or Email to share the video.  
5. Touch Slideshow to display a slide show of the  
available pictures and videos.  
6. To delete the video being displayed, touch  
Share to use Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi  
• White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto,  
Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
• Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in video  
composition.  
Delete  
and then touch Delete to delete the video or Cancel to  
exit.  
• Storage: Set whether to store you videos on your device or on  
your memory card.  
• Reset: Reset all Camera settings to the defaults. Touch OK  
.
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Photo Editor  
Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera  
The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions  
for photos that you take on your device. Along with basic  
image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color, it also  
provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the photo.  
7. To play a video, touch  
pause the video and touch  
playing the video.  
Play. Touch  
Pause to  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Photo editor  
Apps  
Resume to resume  
.
2. Touch Select picture to edit a photo in your Gallery.  
8. Touch and drag the  
white dot on the progress  
– or –  
bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left  
end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the  
right end of the progress bar to end the video playback.  
– or –  
Touch Take picture to take a photo with the camera.  
3. Touch the photo to load it into the Photo editor.  
4. Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your  
photo:  
Touch  
Fast Forward to end the video.  
9. Touch SoundAlive to set the sound quality to  
Normal, Voice, Movie, or Virtual 7.1 ch.  
Rewind to restart the video or  
Selection: Touch the selection icon and then  
touch Magnetic  
Squaretosethowtomarkanareaforcropping,  
rotating, and so on. Touch to select a  
single area, to add to a selected area, or  
,
Lasso, Brush, Round, or  
10. Press  
Back to return to the Camcorder.  
to remove part of a selected area.  
SelectionSize:SetthesizeoftheGrabselection  
area. Drag the slider from small to large.  
Multimedia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
     
5. When all updates to the photo have been made, touch  
Save. Use the keyboard to name the edited photo  
and touch OK to save it.  
Inverse:Selecttheentirepictureexceptforthe  
selected area.  
Undo: Remove the last change.  
6. While editing a photo, touch  
Menu to display the  
following options:  
Redo: Restore a removed change.  
• Select picture: Open a new photo for editing.  
Take picture: Open the Camera and take a new photo.  
• Share via: Send photos to another device or another person.  
Options are: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Group Cast,  
Picasa, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
Rotate: Rotate a photo to the left or to the right  
or create a mirror image of the photo.  
Resize: Touch and then drag the corners of the  
photo to resize it.  
• Set as: Use this photo as a Contact photo, a Home and lock  
Crop:Touchtocrop(cut-out)anareaofaphoto.  
screens  
,
Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper  
image.  
Color: Set the Auto adjustment  
Saturation Contrast Brightness, and Hue of a  
photo. You can also make it Grey-scale or add  
Temperature effect.  
,
Exposure,  
,
,
a
Effects:Addvariouseffectstoyourphoto,such  
as Blur Motion Distortion Filter, or Frames  
,
,
,
.
Tools: Copy and Paste to another image or to  
the original image. You can use the Spot  
healing option.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Games  
Real Racing 2  
Real Racing 2 is a high definition, 3D racer that has you  
racing as a Rookie on a racing circuit.  
Tip: A shortcut to Real Racing 2 displays on a Home screen by  
default.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Real Racing 2  
.
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Real Racing 2.  
2. The first time you access this game tap DOWNLOAD to  
download the game and play.  
3. Enjoy the game!  
Multimedia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
 
Section 7: Connections  
This section describes the various connections your device  
can make including accessing the Internet with your  
Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting to your PC.  
Browser  
Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section  
explains how to navigate Browser and introduces you to the  
basic features.  
Accessing the Web  
Your device is equipped with a full HTML Browser that allows  
you to access the Internet.  
Tip: Browser displays by default as a Primary shortcut on the  
Navigating the Internet  
Home screen.  
The following options are available for Internet navigation.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Browser.  
Command Keys  
Touch  
Back or  
to return to the previous page.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Touch and hold  
Back to display browser History. For more  
Browser  
.
The Most visited screen displays.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Touch  
Touch  
Forward to go forward to a recent page.  
Selecting Items On a Page  
While browsing, use gestures and menus to navigate:  
Refresh to reload the current page.  
Touch an item to select it.  
Touching and Dragging  
Touch and drag your finger on the screen to navigate pages and  
Touch a hyperlink to follow the link.  
Touch and hold on a hyperlink for these options:  
to reposition pages within the screen.  
Entering Text in a Field  
Open: Open the linked page.  
Open in new tab: Open a new window to display the linked  
page.  
While browsing, touch a text field to display the virtual QWERTY  
keyboard to enter text.  
Save link: Save the linked page to Download history.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Select text: Copy the link text to the clipboard.  
Touch and hold an image for the additional options:  
Save image: Download an image. View downloaded images in  
Gallery.  
Copy image: Copy an image to the clipboard.  
View image: View the image source.  
Set as wallpaper: Use the image as your home screen  
wallpaper.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
3. Touch a match to complete the URL.  
Using Browser Windows  
You can have multiple windows open at one time and easily  
– or –  
switch between windows.  
Continue entering characters and touch the Go key to  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. To open a new window, touch  
screen.  
Browser  
.
load the page.  
at the top of the  
Copying Fields or Text  
Copy information from a webpage to the clipboard for  
pasting, searching, or sharing.  
3. To switch to another open window, touch its tab at the  
top of the screen.  
Selecting, Copying, and Pasting Text  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
4. To delete an open window, touch the tab at the top of  
Browser.  
the screen, and then touch  
Entering a URL  
Access a website quickly by entering the URL.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Browser  
.
2. Browse to a webpage.  
3. On the webpage, touch and hold on the text until you  
see the text you want highlighted, then stop touching  
the screen.  
.
2. Touch the URL field at the top of the screen, then enter  
the URL using the virtual QWERTY keyboard.  
The text is highlighted.  
4. Touch and drag the  
tabs to the left or right to  
As you enter characters, potential matches display.  
select more or less text.  
5. Touch Copy at the top of the screen to copy the  
selected text or touch Done to stop.  
Note: Use the  
necessary.  
Delete key to clear the URL field, if  
6. To paste the copied text, navigate to the desired field  
(or to another application), then touch and hold in a text  
field and touch Paste in the pop-up.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and Pasting a Hyperlink or URL  
Accessing Bookmarks and History  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Browser.  
Launch a bookmarked page or reload recent pages.  
2. Browse to a webpage.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Bookmarks History, and Saved pages  
3. On the Bookmarks tab, use these options:  
Browser.  
3. Touch and hold on the link or URL, then touch Copy link  
URL on the pop-up menu.  
,
.
4. To paste the copied link or URL, navigate to the desired  
field (or to another application), then touch and hold in  
a text field and touch Paste on the pop-up menu.  
Touch a bookmark to load the page.  
Touch and hold on a bookmark for these options:  
Open: Open the bookmarked page.  
Using Bookmarks  
While browsing, bookmark a site to quickly access it later.  
Open in new tab: Open the linked page in a new window.  
Edit bookmark: Make changes to the bookmark description.  
Add shortcut to home screen: Create a bookmark on the  
Home screen.  
Creating a bookmark  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Browser  
.
2. Browse to a website, then touch  
Add bookmark  
.
Share link: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, or Wi-Fi  
Direct to send the link.  
The Add bookmark options list displays. Confirm the  
Name and URL Address for the bookmark.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Delete bookmark: Remove the bookmark.  
Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home  
page.  
3. In the Folder field, touch the drop-down menu, and  
touch Homescreen  
4. Touch OK to save the bookmark.  
A gold star displays on the Bookmarked page.  
,
Bookmarks, or Other folder  
.
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
     
4. On the History tab, touch Today  
Last month Older, or Most visited to use these options:  
Touch a page to reload it.  
,
Yesterday, Last 7 days,  
Browser Menu  
While viewing a webpage, touch  
options:  
,
Menu for the following  
Touch the  
star  
next to a page to bookmark it. Touch a gold  
next to a page to remove the bookmark.  
Home: Display the Home page.  
New tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a new tab.  
New incognito tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a  
new tab, and the pages you view in the new window will not  
appear in your browser history or search history. See the on-  
Touch and hold on a page for these options:  
Open: Open the webpage.  
Open in new tab: Launch the webpage in a new window.  
Add bookmark/Remove from Bookmarks: Bookmark the  
page or remove the bookmark for this page.  
Share link: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, or Wi-Fi  
Direct to send the link.  
screen explanation of going incognito  
.
Add shortcut to home screen: Add the URL for this webpage as  
a shortcut on the first home screen.  
Share page: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, or  
Wi-Fi Direct to send the webpage URL.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Remove from history: Remove the record of this page.  
Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home  
page.  
Find on page: Search for content on the current page.  
Desktop view: Your browser displays a website in a modified  
format that makes it easier to read. Desktop view displays a  
website the same way it would appear on a PC.  
Save for offline reading: Saves the webpage so you can read it  
later even when offline.  
5. On the Saved pages tab, use these options:  
Touch a page to reload it.  
Touch and hold on a page and then touch Remove from saved  
Downloads: View and manage recent downloads.  
pages to remove the page from Saved pages.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print: Print the current screen or page to a Samsung printer.  
Settings: Configure web settings. For more information, refer to  
“Browser Settings” on page 119.  
State: Enter your state.  
Postcode: Enter your ZIP code.  
Country: Enter your country.  
Phone: Enter your telephone number.  
Email: Enter a valid email address.  
Browser Settings  
Use the browser settings to customize the browser.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Browser  
.
Privacy and security  
2. While viewing a webpage, touch  
Menu  
Settings.  
• Clear cache: Delete content and databases stored on the  
device.  
Customize the Browser by using the following options:  
• Clear history: Delete the list of previously-visited pages.  
• Show security warnings: When enabled, the Browser warns  
you if there is a problem with a site’s security.  
• Accept cookies: When enabled, allows Browser to save and  
read cookie information used by webpages.  
• Clear all cookie data: Delete cookie information saved to the  
device.  
General  
• Set home page: View and set the default first page that  
displays when you launch the Browser.  
• Form auto-fill: Enable or disable form auto-fill to complete  
Web forms with a single click.  
• Auto-fill text: If Form auto-fill is enabled, set up the following  
information:  
• Remember form data: When enabled, stores information you  
enter into forms to make future forms easier.  
• Clear form data: Deletes saved form information.  
• Enable location: When enabled, sites you visit can request  
access to your location.  
Full name: Enter your name.  
Company name: Enter a company name.  
Address line 1: Enter your address.  
Address line 2: Enter any additional address information.  
City/Town: Enter your city and town.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
 
• Clear location access: Clear location access for all websites.  
• Remember passwords: When enabled, saves user names  
and passwords for sites you visit, to make future visits easier.  
• Clear passwords: Clear all saved user names and passwords.  
• Enable notifications: Set web notifications access information  
as Always on, On demand, or Off.  
• Inverted screen rendering: Use the Preview screen and the  
following controls to configure inverted screen rendering:  
Inverted rendering: Enable the display of websites with  
inverted colors – black becomes white and vice versa.  
Contrast: If Inverted rendering is enabled, use this slider to set  
the contrast, which can range from 100 to 300 percent.  
Advanced  
• Clear notifications: Remove web notification access  
information.  
• Select search engine: Choose a search engine from Google,  
Yahoo!, or Bing.  
Accessibility  
• Open in background: When enabled, new windows open  
behind the current window.  
• Force zoom: Override the website's request to control zoom.  
Text size: Use the Preview field and the following controls to  
configure text size:  
• Enable JavaScript: When enabled, the Browser automatically  
runs JavaScript scripts on pages you visit.  
• Enable plug-ins: When enabled, the Browser automatically  
loads and runs plug-ins on pages you visit.  
• Default storage: Select where Browser stores files.  
• Website settings: View and manage settings for individual  
websites.  
Scale text up and down: Scale the text size up or down using  
a slider bar.  
Zoom amount on double tap: Set how much to zoom when  
you double-tap the screen, from 175 to 225 percent.  
Minimum font size: Set the minimum font size, which can  
range from 1 point to 24 points.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,  
or Close.  
• Load images: When enabled, images are automatically loaded  
when you visit a page. When disabled, images are indicated by  
a link, which you can touch to download the picture.  
Labs  
• Open pages in overview: When enabled, displays an overview  
of newly-opened pages.  
• Auto-fit pages: When enabled, the Browser automatically  
sizes webpages to fit your device’s display.  
• Block pop-ups: When enabled, blocks pop-up windows.  
Text encoding: Choose a default character set for webpages.  
• Reset to default: Clear all browser data and reset all settings to  
the factory defaults.  
• Quick controls: When enabled, the Application and URL bars  
are hidden. To access the hidden controls, swipe inward from  
the left or right edge of the screen to access Quick Controls. For  
• Google Instant: When enabled, you can use Google Instant  
when you use Google Search to show results as you type.  
Enabling this option can increase data use.  
Bandwidth management  
• Preload search results: Enable the browser to preload high  
confidence search results in the background to help speed up  
searches. Options are: Never, Only via Wi-Fi, or Always.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
4. Without lifting your finger, move to an option and then  
lift your finger to initiate the option.  
Browser Quick Controls  
Use Quick Controls to maximize your viewing area while  
browsing the Internet.  
5. To cancel, display the Quick controls and touch  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Browser  
.
Menu  
Settings  
Labs and touch Quick controls  
to uncheck it.  
2. While viewing a webpage, touch  
Menu  
Settings  
Labs, and then touch Quick Controls to enable the  
function.  
The Application and URL bars are hidden.  
Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi is a wireless networking technology that provides  
access to local area networks. Use your device’s Wi-Fi  
feature to:  
3. Swipe inward from the left or right edge of the screen  
Access the Internet for browsing or to send and receive email.  
Access your corporate network.  
to access quick controls.  
Use hotspots provided by hotels or airports while traveling.  
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing Wireless  
Access Point (WAP). WAPs can be Open (unsecured, as with  
most hotspots) or Secured (requiring you to provide login  
credentials). Your device supports the 802.11 b/g/n Wi-Fi  
protocol.  
Configuring Wi-Fi Settings  
For more information about configuring your device’s Wi-Fi  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Finding Wi-Fi Networks  
You can have your device automatically notify you of  
Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
When you turn on Wi-Fi, your device searches for available  
Wi-Fi connections, then displays them on screen.  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off  
The Status Details displays.  
Turn your device’s Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn  
Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically searches for  
available, in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).  
Turning Wi-Fi On  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On. Your device automatically  
scans for available Wireless Access Points.  
3. When the scan is complete, touch a Wi-Fi network to  
connect. If the Wi-Fi network is open, your device  
automatically connects. If the Wi-Fi network is  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
The Status Details displays.  
secured, enter the password at the prompt to connect.  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On.  
Turning Wi-Fi Off  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
Adding a Wi-Fi Network Manually  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings.  
The Status Details displays.  
2. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on.  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi Off.  
3. Touch Add Wi-Fi network, then enter network  
information:  
• Network SSID: Enter the name of the Wi-Fi Wireless Access  
Point (WAP).  
• Security: Select the type of security used by the WAP.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
     
Connecting With Samsung Kies  
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP,  
additional network information may be required, such as  
a Password.  
1. Install Samsung Kies software on your PC.  
Warning! Close any running applications before connecting  
your device to a PC.  
• Password: If the WAP is secured, enter the password or hex  
key.  
2. Run Samsung Kies.  
4. Touch Save to save the settings.  
3. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
4. Touch More settings  
Apps  
Kies Via Wi-Fi  
Samsung Kies is a software that enables you to update your  
device firmware, synchronize files, and transfer data to and  
from your device directly by connecting to the PC.  
.
Kies via Wi-Fi.  
Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.  
5. Follow the prompts from Kies to update your device  
firmware.  
Note: Some features will be supported through the System  
Updates feature in the future. For more information,  
6. Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information.  
To learn more about Samsung Kies and Samsung  
applications, browse featured applications and download  
.
Note: Samsung Kies works on both PC and Macintosh  
computers.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. On that device, touch Accept  
.
Wi-Fi Direct  
You have 30 seconds to touch Accept on the device to  
which you want to connect for the connection to be  
made.  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings Wi-Fi Direct  
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi Direct  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Once connected, the other device will show as  
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the  
icon will display at the bottom of your screen.  
2. Touch the  
on.  
If you are currently connected to a Wi-Fi network, a  
prompt displays Start Wi-Fi direct operation. This will  
Sharing Information with Connected Device  
To share videos, photos, or other information with the  
connected device, follow these steps:  
turn off Wi-Fi client/hotspot operation  
.
3. Touch OK to continue.  
1. View the information that you want to share. For  
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in  
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then touch the  
Share, Share via, or Send via option.  
Your device will begin to search for other devices  
enabled with Wi-Fi direct connections.  
4. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct tab to display Available devices.  
5. Enable Wi-Fi Direct (similar to Steps 1 and 2) on the  
device to which you want to connect.  
2. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct option.  
The Wi-Fi Direct settings screen displays, Wi-Fi Direct  
is turned on, and you device scans for other devices.  
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,  
touch on it.  
3. Touch a connected device name. For example,  
Android_XXXX.  
An Invitation to connect displays on the device to which  
you want to connect.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
     
4. Touch Done  
.
Turning Bluetooth On or Off  
To turn Bluetooth on or off:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
The other device displays a pop-up that indicates it is  
receiving the file.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
The file is transferred and can be found in My Files in  
2. Under Wireless and network, on the Bluetooth tab,  
the ShareViaWifi folder.  
touch the  
off.  
OFF / ON icon to turn Bluetooth on or  
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and  
shared folder information may differ.  
Note: When Bluetooth is on, the Bluetooth icon  
displays in  
the Status Bar.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications  
technology for exchanging information over a distance of  
about 30 feet.  
Pairing with a Bluetooth Device  
Search for a Bluetooth device and pair with it to exchange  
information between your device and the target device.  
You do not need to line up the devices to send information  
with Bluetooth. If the devices are in range, you can exchange  
information between them, even if they are in different  
rooms.  
Tip: After pairing, your device and the target device recognize  
each other and exchange information without having to  
enter a passcode or PIN.  
Configuring Bluetooth Settings  
Configure your device’s Bluetooth settings. For more  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
Apps  
.
2. On the Bluetooth tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon  
to turn Bluetooth on.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. Enable the target device’s discoverable or visible  
mode.  
Disconnecting a Paired Device  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection  
between the device and your tablet, but retains the  
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to  
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the  
connection information again.  
4. Touch the Bluetooth tab and then touch Scan. Touch  
Stop at any time to stop scanning.  
5. From the list of found devices, touch the target device,  
then follow the prompts to complete the pairing:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
2. Touch the  
turn Bluetooth On.  
Apps  
If the target device requires a PIN, enter a PIN for the target  
device and touch OK. When prompted, enter the PIN on the  
target device.  
.
OFF / ON icon next to Bluetooth to  
If the device allows automatic or smart pairing, your device  
attempts to pair with the device automatically. Follow the  
prompts on your device and the target device to complete the  
pairing.  
3. Touch a previously paired device.  
A Disconnect? pop-up displays.  
4. Touch OK  
.
6. Once your tablet is paired with the target device, touch  
Note: Disconnections are done manually, but often occur  
automatically if the paired device is out of range of the  
device or the device is powered off.  
next to the device name in the Paired devices list.  
Touch Rename to change the named of the paired device.  
Touch Unpair to unpair from the paired device.  
Touch other options under Profiles as required.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
Deleting a Paired Device (Unpair)  
Receiving Data from a Bluetooth Device  
To receive data from a Bluetooth device:  
Deleting a device from your Paired devices list removes its  
connection record. Once a device is unpaired, reconnection  
requires that you enter all the previous pairing information.  
Note: To select the length of time that your device will be  
visible, select  
Menu  
Visible time-out.  
2. Touch  
next to the paired device name.  
3. Touch Unpair to unpair the paired device.  
2. Pair with the Bluetooth device from which you want to  
Sharing Data with a Bluetooth Device  
To send data to a Bluetooth device:  
1. Select a file or item from an appropriate application.  
2. Select an option for sharing data with the Bluetooth  
feature.  
A Bluetooth authorization request pop-up displays  
when a Bluetooth device sends data to your device.  
3. Select Accept to confirm that you are willing to receive  
data.  
Note: The method for selecting an option may vary by data  
A File received message displays.  
type.  
Received data is saved to the Bluetooth folder. If you receive  
a contact, it is saved to your contacts automatically.  
3. Search for and pair with a Bluetooth device. For more  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uninstalling an App  
Managing Downloads  
Apps come pre-installed on your device and you can  
download additional apps from Google Play. If you decide to,  
you can uninstall apps you downloaded from Google Play and  
other sources.  
Files, apps, and other items you download in Browser, Gmail,  
Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal  
storage. You can use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or  
delete what you have downloaded.  
There are several ways to uninstall an app:  
To manage the demands on their networks or to help you  
avoid unexpected charges, some mobile networks place  
restrictions on the size of the files you can download. When  
you are connected to such networks, and you try to  
download an oversized-file, you are asked or required to  
delay downloading the file until the next time you are  
connected to a Wi-Fi network. At that time, the download  
resumes automatically. The Downloads app can also be used  
to view and manage these queued files.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Application manager  
2. Touch the Downloaded tab.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
3. Touch the app you want to uninstall.  
4. Touch the Uninstall button.  
A pop-up displays the message Application will be  
uninstalled.  
Downloaded files are stored in the Download directory in  
your tablet’s internal storage. You can view and copy files  
from this directory when connected to a computer with a  
USB cable.  
5. Touch OK to confirm you want to uninstall the app.  
You can also use Google Play to uninstall apps you  
Tip: To uninstall updates to pre-installed apps, touch the app  
and touch Uninstall updates. A pop-up displays the  
message All updates to this Android system app will be  
uninstalled. Touch OK to uninstall the updates.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
     
To uninstall an app from the Apps screen:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
2. Touch Menu Downloaded applications  
The Downloaded applications screen displays.  
3. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync  
list and begin synchronizing.  
.
.
4. When finished, exit Windows Media Player and  
disconnect the USB cable.  
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Uninstall.  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the  
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
A
appears on Apps that can be uninstalled.  
4. Touch an app’s icon and then touch OK to uninstall and  
remove the app from your tablet.  
Note: You cannot uninstall the apps that are included with  
Android. You can only uninstall the apps you have  
downloaded.  
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as folder  
Card, separate from the internal memory, which is folder  
Tablet  
.
Synchronizing with Windows Media  
Player  
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC.  
1. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable.  
Your computer recognizes the connection and displays  
the AutoPlay screen.  
1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files  
from or to the memory card.  
2. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable.  
Your computer recognizes the connection and displays  
the AutoPlay screen.  
3. Click the option to Open device to view files  
.
2. Click the option to Sync digital media files to this device  
You should see a Card and a Tablet folder.  
to synchronize music files.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Copy files from the PC to the memory card (Card  
Formatting a Memory Card  
Formatting erases all content from the memory card and  
folder).  
5. When finished, close the PC folder and disconnect the  
prepares it for use with your device.  
USB cable.  
Formatting a Memory Card Using Your Device  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
2. After mounting the SD card, touch Format SD card  
Apps  
Settings  
Memory Card  
Your device supports removable microSD™ or microSDHC™  
memory cards for storing music, photos, videos, and files.  
.
.
3. Follow the prompts to confirm the formatting of the  
card.  
Installing and Removing a Memory Card  
For more information about installing and removing a  
Formatting a Memory Card Using Your Computer  
Consult your computer and/or memory card reader  
documentation for information about formatting memory  
cards.  
Important! To prevent damage to information stored on the  
memory card, always unmount the card before  
removing it from the device.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
     
Section 8: Applications and Widgets  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
available on the Apps screen, its function, and how to  
navigate through that particular application. If the application  
is already described in another section of this user manual,  
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
Various widgets are also described.  
GPS Applications  
GPS applications allow you to achieve real-time, GPS-  
enabled, turn-by-turn navigation and to access local  
searches based on a variety of category parameters.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
Update Available  
When you open an application that is preloaded on your  
device, an Update Available message may be displayed if  
there is a new version of the app available.  
Global GPS turn-by-turn navigation, mapping, and Point of  
Interest content is available for three continents, including  
North America (U.S., Canada, and Mexico), Western Europe,  
and China, where wireless coverage is available.  
Touch Upgrade to update the app or touch Not Now to  
open the app without updating.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Alarm  
Important! If you touch or cover the internal GPS antenna  
while using GPS services, it may impede the GPS  
signal resulting in the GPS services not working in  
an optimal manner. Refer to the following diagram  
to locate the approximate location of the internal  
GPS antenna.  
Set alarms for reminders or for wake-up times.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Adding and Configuring Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch Alarm  
2. Touch Create alarm or touch an alarm that is  
already set.  
3. Touch fields to configure the alarm:  
• Set time: Set a time for the alarm to sound. Touch the buttons  
above or below the hour and minute, and above AM PM  
Apps  
Alarm.  
.
Location of Internal Antennas  
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi  
GPS Antenna Antenna  
/
.
• Alarm repeat: Choose days for the alarm to repeat. Alarm days  
are blue.  
• Repeat weekly: Set the alarm to repeat at the same time every  
week.  
• Volume: Touch and drag the slider to set alarm volume.  
• Alarm tone: Choose a tone for the alarm.  
(Back view  
of device)  
Model:SGH-I497 SKU:SGHI498ZSA FCC ID:A3LSGHI497 RATED:5V=;2A  
For Information Call  
1
888 987 4357 MADE IN CHINA BY SAMSUNG  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
     
• Snooze: Enable or disable the snooze option for the alarm. If  
enabled, set the following options:  
Editing and Deleting Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Alarm.  
Duration: Set the snooze duration to 3, 5, 10, 15, or 30  
minutes.  
2. Touch and hold an alarm and then touch one of the  
following options:  
Repeat: Set the snooze to repeat 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 times.  
• Delete: Delete the alarm.  
• Smart alarm: Activates simulated nature sounds prior to the  
main alarm. If enabled, set the following options:  
Interval: Set the duration to 3, 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes.  
– or –  
Tone: Set the Smart alarm tone.  
Touch  
to delete or touch Select all, and then touch Delete  
Turning Off an Alarm  
When the alarm sounds, to turn off the alarm:  
Touch and drag to the right.  
Delete, touch the existing alarms you want  
• Name: Touch the field and use the keyboard to enter a name  
for the alarm.  
.
4. Touch Done to save the alarm.  
The main Alarm screen displays showing the new or  
updated alarm.  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds:  
Activating Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Alarm  
Turn alarm on to activate the alarm. A gray  
alarm means the alarm is deactivated.  
.
Touch and slide  
set in the alarm settings.  
to the left. Snooze must first be  
2. Touch  
3. Touch an alarm to change any of its settings and then  
touch Done to save the updates.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer  
AllShare Play  
AllShare PlayTM allows your tablet to stream photos, music,  
and videos from its memory to other DLNA certifiedTM (Digital  
Living Network Alliance) devices. Your tablet can also play  
digital content streamed from other DLNA certified devices.  
2. From a Home screen, touch  
AllShare Play  
Apps  
.
Note: To view more information about DLNA certified products  
Note: If prompted, read the on-screen message about network  
.
charges and touch OK to continue.  
Configuring AllShare Play  
The AllShare Play Sign In screen displays.  
You must first connect both of your communicating devices  
to the same Wi-Fi and be using an active and registered  
Samsung account prior to using this application. For more  
Connect to Wi-Fi, configure AllShare Play settings to identify  
your device as a server, and set treatment of copied files.  
3. Touch Sign in  
.
The Samsung account screen displays.  
4. Touch Create new account, if you have not set up a  
Samsung account, or touch Sign in, if you have already  
set up a Samsung account.  
Important! The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username and password) to several  
applications, such as AllShare Play.  
The AllShare Play Start screen displays.  
5. Touch Start  
The AllShare Play main screen displays.  
6. For more information, touch Menu  
Applications and Widgets  
.
FAQ.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Use the keyboard to enter a PIN code and touch Done  
This process makes sure only desired recipients can  
view your shared image.  
.
Using Group Cast  
While using various applications, such as  
Gallery, when  
you touch  
an option.  
Share to share a file, you see Group Cast as  
The AllShare Play - Group Cast screen displays and the  
device waits for other connected recipients to accept  
the connection and enter the PIN on their screens.  
Group Cast is an easy way to share files in real time with  
others who are on the same Wi-Fi network. Group Cast can  
be used when you want to share documents, images, music,  
and so on.  
4. Touch OK to start the group cast process while other  
users connect.  
You can use Group Cast for meetings, sales presentations,  
conferences, and classes. All you need is a Wi-Fi network  
that works with Group Cast, and most do.  
You can now interact and draw with the on-screen  
image, and users will instantaneously see the same  
gestures and also be able to interact.  
To share a file using Group Cast:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Navigate to the file you want to share and touch  
Share Group Cast  
Apps  
Gallery.  
Note: The newly altered image (with markups and comments)  
can not be saved, but you can take a screen shot of the  
current image and save it to your Clipboard. For more  
.
Note: After the initial Group Cast request, touch  
Group Cast instead of  
Share.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Amazon Kindle  
Tip: A shortcut to AT&T displays on the main Home screen in  
Use the Amazon KindleTM application to download books for  
reading, right on your device.  
an AT&T folder by default.  
Using myAT&T  
Note: You must be registered with Amazon to use the Kindle  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
AT&T  
AT&T  
.
application.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
AT&T  
.
Tip: A shortcut to Amazon Kindle displays on a Home screen  
The AT&T home page displays.  
by default.  
2. Touch myAT&T  
.
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Amazon Kindle  
.
The myAT&T page displays.  
3. Touch Register now and follow the on-screen  
instructions to set up a User ID and Password.  
4. On the myAT&T screen, enter your User ID and  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Amazon Kindle.  
AT&T  
Password using the on-screen keypad, then touch  
Log in  
5. Use the helpful videos to learn more about myAT&T.  
.
myAT&T allows you to manage your own AT&T account. You  
can review and pay your bill, check minutes and data usage,  
upgrade to a new device, or change your rate plan.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
         
2. Touch Update to update the software.  
3. If you do not have an account, touch Create New  
Account and follow the on-screen instructions.  
– or –  
AT&T Communication Manager  
AT&T Communication Manager is the easy-to-use, all-in-one  
tool that helps you view and manage your data plan.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
AT&T Communication Manager  
.
If you already have an account, enter your Phone  
Number and Password in the appropriate fields and  
The AT&T Communication Manager screen displays.  
touch Submit  
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to manage your data  
plan.  
Note: For more information, visit http://www.att.com/familymap  
.
AT&T FamilyMap  
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind because you can  
use it to conveniently locate a family member on a map from  
your wireless device. Plus, AT&T FamilyMap is secure and  
private. Only authorized users have permission to locate your  
family members.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
AT&T FamilyMap  
Apps  
.
The AT&T FamilyMap screen displays from the Play  
Store.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AT&T Navigator  
AT&T Navigator provides access to real-time GPS-driven  
applications. These programs not only allow you to achieve  
turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local searches.  
Browser  
Your device includes a full HTML Browser, to access the  
Internet.  
Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature.  
Tip: A shortcut to Browser displays on the main Home screen  
by default.  
Tip: A shortcut to AT&T Navigator displays on the main Home  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Browser.  
screen in an AT&T folder by default.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
AT&T  
Browser.  
AT&T Navigator.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
AT&T Navigator  
Apps  
.
The Terms of Service screen displays.  
2. Touch Full Terms and Conditions and then touch Accept  
.
3. Use the keypad to enter your AT&T mobile phone  
number and touch Continue  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
       
Calculator  
The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions to  
solve simple arithmetic problems and advanced operators to  
solve more complex problems.  
Calendar  
Your device includes a powerful Calendar to help you  
organize your schedules more conveniently and effectively.  
Learn to create and manage events and tasks, and set  
alarms to remind yourself of important events and tasks.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Calculator  
Apps  
.
Tip: A shortcut to Calendar displays on a Home screen by  
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.  
default.  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the  
+
(add),  
-
(subtract),  
×
(multiply), or  
÷
(divide) key.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Calendar.  
4. Enter the next number.  
– or –  
5. To view the result, touch the  
=
(equals) key.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as many times as required.  
7. Touch to clear the result.  
Calendar.  
2. Touch a tab to choose a calendar view:  
Year: Display all twelve months of this year. Sweep across the  
years at the bottom of the screen to display another year.  
• Month: Display the current month. Touch a month and year at  
the bottom of the screen to display another month.  
• Week: Display the current week. Touch a week at the bottom of  
the screen to display another week.  
8. For more advanced problems, rotate your device to  
landscape mode and use the advanced operators sin  
,
ln,  
cos, log, tan, and so on, just as you would on a  
pocket calculator.  
9. Touch and hold entries in the Calculator’s display field  
to copy or cut the contents of the display.  
Copied to clipboard displays. Paste the copied value in  
another app.  
• Day: Display today’s schedule by hour. Touch day at the bottom  
of the screen to display another day.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• List: Display only event and task names and dates for a  
selected year. Touch a year at the bottom of the screen to  
display another year. Touch a date to hide or show the event or  
task name.  
• Zoom in: In the Week and Day views, increase the size of the  
area being viewed.  
• Zoom out: In the Week and Day views, decrease the size of the  
area being viewed.  
Task: Display your list of tasks. Touch the sort field to change  
how your tasks are sorted. Tasks can be sorted by due date,  
priority, date, week, month, or group.  
• Go to: Use the Set date pop-up to enter a date and then touch  
Set to display that date on your calendar.  
• Delete: Delete events for the year, month, week, day, week,  
month, before today, or all events, depending on the Calendar  
view.  
3. Swipe left or right across the screen to view other days  
or other weeks. Swipe up or down the screen to view  
other events.  
• Sync: Manually synchronizes the calendar entries among all of  
your current accounts, for example, Gmail, Exchange, and so  
on.  
4. To find an event or task, touch  
Search.  
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a search term.  
Possible events display as you type.  
• Show controls Hide controls: Show or hide a small month  
/
calendar and a list of events in landscape mode.  
• Settings: Customize the calendar. For more information, refer  
Touch  
Touch an event to send, edit, or delete the event.  
5. Touch Add event / Add task and then touch Done to  
add a new event to your calendar. For more  
on the keyboard to remove it.  
7. Touch Today to return to the current date.  
8. Touch Calendars to configure which events to display.  
Touch Add account  
Add account to add  
additional accounts from which calendar events can be  
synced.  
6. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
Creating an Event or Task  
To create an event or task:  
Managing Events  
You can delete, send, and edit events on your mobile device:  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Calendar  
.
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Calendar  
.
2. Double-tap the date for which you want to enter an all  
2. Touch an event.  
day event or task.  
A pop-up displays event information.  
3. Touch Menu Forward to forward the event using  
your primary email account.  
Touch Menu Share via and then touch Bluetooth  
Touch the Add event or Add task tab.  
Touch the My calendar field and touch a calendar to which the  
even or task should be added.  
,
Use the keyboard to enter the event or task name.  
Email, or Wi-Fi Direct to share the event.  
Touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the event.  
Touch Edit to update the event details.  
– or –  
– or –  
Touch the date for which you want to enter an event or  
task.  
Touch  
.
Touch  
Options and then touch  
Edit  
Delete,  
Touch the Add event or Add task tab.  
Share via, or  
.
Enter the event or task information.  
3. Touch Save  
.
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Lock time zone: Allows you to lock event times and dates  
based on your selected time zone, which is defined by the  
following field.  
Add Additional Calendar Accounts  
To add additional accounts:  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Calendars Add account  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
The Accounts and sync screen displays.  
Calendar  
• Select time zone: If Lock time zone is enabled, used this  
option to select a time zone to lock event times and dates.  
• Show week number: Show the week number to the left of  
each week in the Month view.  
.
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Calendars: Enable calendars for your various accounts.  
Event notification  
2. Touch Add account to display the Add account option.  
3. Touch an account type and enter your account  
information.  
• Set alerts & notifications: Touch to select, which allows you to  
set the Alert, Status bar notification, or Off.  
• Select ringtone: Choose a tone for calendar notifications.  
• Default reminder time: Set the default time for a notification  
before an event is to occur.  
Calendar Settings  
To set up Calendar preferences:  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Settings  
Calendar.  
• Notifications while screen is off: Enable or disable the display  
of notifications on the full screen while the screen is turned off.  
.
The following options display:  
View settings  
• First day of week: Choose a day to begin each week.  
• Hide declined events: Enable or disable display of events.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
 
Sync settings  
Contacts  
Store contact information for your friends, family and  
colleagues, to quickly access information or to send a  
message.  
• Sync events/tasks: Displays the General sync settings. For  
(Accounts)  
Touch an account and then touch the check box to enable or  
disable the calendar sync for that account.  
Tip: A shortcut to Contacts displays on a Home screen by  
default.  
Camera  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Contacts  
Apps  
.
Take photos and record video with your device’s built in  
Camera.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts.  
Tip: A shortcut to Camera displays on the main Home screen  
by default.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Camera.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Camera.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Downloads  
Dual Clock  
Files, apps, and other items you download in Browser, Email,  
Gmail, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal  
storage. Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete  
what you have downloaded.  
Display the time for two different locations.  
To add the Dual clock widget to a Home screen, see “Adding  
1. From a Home screen, locate the Dual clock widget.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Downloads  
2. Touch an item to open it.  
Apps  
The Dual clock widget is actually two widgets. Each  
widget displays the time and a city name.  
.
2. Touch either widget to choose a different city than the  
3. Touch headings for earlier downloads to view them.  
one currently displayed.  
4. Touch items you want to send, to check them, and then  
Email  
touch  
Share. Touch an option to share the item.  
Send and receive email using popular email services.  
Options are: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Group  
Cast, Photo editor, Picasa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.  
5. Touch items you want to delete, to check them, and  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Email.  
then touch  
Delete.  
The items are deleted from your tablet.  
6. Touch Sort by size or Sort by date, at the bottom of the  
Downloads pop-up, to switch back and forth.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
         
Gallery  
Google+  
Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos.  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+.  
Tip: A shortcut to Gallery displays on a Home screen by  
default.  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Gallery.  
To get started:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Google+  
The Google+ home screen displays.  
2. Touch Menu Help and then touch a topic to  
learn more about using Google+.  
Apps  
.
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
Gmail  
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
email.  
Latitude  
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your  
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your  
location.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
You must first set up your tablet to use wireless networks to  
help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when  
Wi-Fi is enabled.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
To enable Wi-Fi:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sharing Your Location with Friends  
1. From the Latitude map screen, touch  
Apps  
Latitude  
Settings.  
to display your Latitude list of friends. At first, only your  
name is displayed.  
2. Touch Location services  
A green check mark  
enabled.  
Use wireless networks.  
indicates the feature is  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Add friends.  
3. Touch Select from Contacts and touch a contact.  
– or –  
3. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on.  
Touch Add via email address, enter an email address,  
and touch the Send key or close the keyboard and  
touch Add friends  
.
4. Log on to your Google account.  
4. At the Send sharing requests prompt, touch Yes  
.
To create a Google account or set up your Google  
account on your device use Accounts and sync settings.  
Your friend will receive an email or text message with your  
location marked on a map. They will also receive instructions  
on how to view your location from the Internet or use  
Latitude on their device, if it is available. Once they  
acknowledge your request, their location will display on your  
tablet. They can share their location from their computer,  
phone, or tablet.  
5. Touch  
Home  
Apps  
Latitude.  
Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 40  
meters.  
For more information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
   
• My Places: Displays a list of offline maps, starred and recently  
viewed places, My Maps, checked-in, and rated places.  
• Offers: Notifies you if there are interesting offers nearby.  
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to  
Latitude Menu  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Latitude  
Apps  
Latitude.  
2. Touch  
, if necessary.  
3. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
• Add friends: Share your location with friends. For more  
• Help: Launches Google mobile Help.  
Local  
• Check in: Touch a location to check-in so others will know your  
location.  
Google Local is an application that uses Google Maps and  
your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,  
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own  
locations.  
• Refresh friends: Update your Latitude list of friends.  
• Show stale friends / Hide stale friends: Show or hide friends  
depending on the accuracy of their Latitude information.  
• Location settings: Configures the location reporting settings.  
The Local application allows you to find the best sources for  
business information across the web, including business  
listing details, reviews, photos, nearby public transit, and  
other related information. Business owners can provide  
additional details, such as photos, hours of operation, and  
coupons.  
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.  
• Make available offline: Download a map area that you can  
view when your device is offline. To view a downloaded map,  
touch My Places, which is described below.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Choose your location and touch My current  
location or Enter an address. To enter an address, use  
the on-screen keyboard and then touch OK  
Apps  
Local.  
• Latitude: Allows you to find your friends and family on a map  
and share with people you choose.  
.
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Touch one of the business categories to search for a  
particular business.  
Tip: A shortcut to Maps displays on a Home screen by default.  
All of the businesses in that category that are close to  
you display.  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Maps  
.
4. Touch a business in the list to see more details about it.  
The business details such as address, phone, website,  
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews  
from around the web and from Google users.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Maps.  
Navigating the Map  
Zooming  
Double-tap on the screen to zoom in.  
5. Touch your location at the bottom of the Local pop-up  
to write a review, check in here, view reviews and  
details, or choose another location nearby.  
Use two fingers, such as your index finger  
and thumb, to zoom out by making an  
inward pinch motion on the screen. To zoom  
Maps  
in, make an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out.  
Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions,  
and other location-based information.  
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to  
landscape mode.  
Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some  
features require Standalone or Google location services.  
Scrolling  
Touch and drag on the screen to reposition the map in the display.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
   
Touch  
Touch an icon on the map to display information about the  
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to  
location. For example, your location is indicated by a flashing  
and a pop-up that displays your name.  
• Help: Learn about Google maps.  
Other Map Options  
Maps Menu  
Touch the indicated icon to use these additional Map options:  
SearchMaps:Usethekeyboardtoenteryourrequest  
to Search the map for a city, location, and so on.  
Suggestions are displayed as you type.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. While viewing a map, touch  
options:  
Maps  
.
Menu for these  
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.  
• Make available offline: Download a map area that you can  
view when your device is offline. To view a downloaded map,  
touch My Places, which is described below.  
Speak: Just speak a city, location, and so on, to  
display.  
Compass: Set the map to always display northat the  
top of the screen or to automatically rotate like a  
compass, keeping north on the map facing north,  
and so on. Yourdevicemay have tobe calibratedthe  
first time you use this feature. Follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
• Join Latitude / Latitude: Join Latitude, to share your location  
with friends you choose and Google.  
• My Places: Displays a list of offline maps, starred and recently  
viewed places, My Maps, checked-in, and rated places.  
• Offers: Notifies you if there are interesting offers nearby.  
Local: Launch the Local app. For more information,  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scale bar: If enabled, the scale bar is displayed on the map,  
which shows the scale of the map in feet and meters.  
Bubble action: Show a bubble action on bubbles. Options are:  
Get directions, Navigation (driving), Call, or Street view.  
Directions: Displays the Directions pop-up. Enter  
Start point and End point or touch the button to the  
right of the fields to choose your current location, a  
contact’s location, or to touch a point on the map.  
Touch the automobile, bus, bicycle, or walking icon  
for the appropriate directions. Then touch Go to  
display a list of directions. Touch the Directions list  
and scroll up or down. Touch an entry in the  
Directions list to show the point mentioned on the  
map.  
• Offline and Cache  
Automatic caching: Choose Wi-Fi only or Wi-Fi or mobile  
networks for automatic caching while charging and using Wi-Fi.  
Clear all map tiles: Touch OK to delete all offline area and  
cached tiles.  
• Location settings: These settings display if you have joined  
Latitude.  
Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display.  
Choose from Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines,  
Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, or Wikipedia.  
Location reporting: To update your location automatically, set  
the following options:  
Maps Settings  
Use the Maps settings to customize your Maps application.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Maps  
2. Touch Menu Settings to set the following Maps  
options:  
• Display: Set the following Maps display options:  
• Detect your location: Enable or disable whether your  
location is updated automatically.  
.
• Set your location: Set your location manually.  
• Do not update your location: Your friends cannot see  
your automatic location.  
Report from this device: Automatically update your location  
from this device.  
Zoom Buttons: If enabled, the zoom in (+) and zoom out (-)  
buttons are displayed on the map.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
   
Enable location sharing: Share your location with the people  
you choose.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: View information about Google  
Maps, including the Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy, Legal  
Notices, and Web History.  
Manage your friends: Add or remove friends who can see  
your location.  
Media Hub  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content.  
Enable location history: This history is only seen by you.  
Automatic check-ins: Checks you in to places that you have  
designated.  
Check-in notifications: Enables notifications that suggest  
places to check in.  
Note: Media Hub service requires a Samsung account and  
depends on service availability.  
Manage your places: View and modify your automatic check-  
ins and muted places.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Media Hub  
Apps  
• Switch Account: Choose a different Google account. This  
option only appears if you have added more than one Google  
account on your device.  
.
Memo  
Create and manage text memos and use Bluetooth to send  
memos to paired Bluetooth devices.  
• Labs: Access experimental features.  
• What’s New: Link to Google Play Store where you can check  
for a Maps update.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Memo.  
• About: View information about Maps.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Memo.  
• Feedback: Display a Maps feedback form.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Print: Select one or all memos, touch Print, and send the  
memos to a Samsung printer.  
Composing a Memo  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Memo.  
• Sync memo: Sign in to Google and use Google docs to back up  
your memos.  
2. Touch  
New memo, compose the memo, then touch  
Done to save.  
• PIN lock: Set a PIN number to use to lock your memos.  
• Font size: Set the text font size. Options are: Tiny, Small,  
Normal, Large, and Huge.  
Memo List Options  
While viewing the list of Memos:  
4. Touch and hold a memo thumbnail or list entry to  
display the following options:  
1. Touch  
List to view your memos in a list mode.  
Touch an entry in the list on the left to view the memo  
on the right of the screen.  
• Delete: Delete the selected memo.  
• Lock/Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN number to  
remove the lock form the memo. Once you lock a memo, you  
have to use your PIN number to view the memo.  
2. To delete one or more memos, touch  
one or all memos, and touch Delete  
3. Touch Menu for the following options:  
• Sort by: Set whether to sort the memo list by Date  
Color  
• Share via: Select one or all memos, touch Send, and then  
touch Bluetooth Email Gmail, or Wi-Fi Direct to send  
memos to another device or another person.  
Delete, select  
.
• Share via: Touch Bluetooth Email, Gmail, or Wi-Fi Direct to  
,
,
Title, or  
send the memo by the selected method. For more information,  
.
,
,
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
Memo Options  
While viewing a Memo:  
Messages  
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail  
messages together into a single conversation thread and is  
accessible by phone or computer.  
Touch  
Memo options for the following options:  
Delete: Delete this Memo.  
Color: Choose a color for this memo.  
Tip: A shortcut to Messages displays on the main Home  
screen in an AT&T folder by default.  
Lock/Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN  
number to remove the lock form the memo.  
Once you lock a memo, you have to use your  
PIN number to view the memo.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
AT&T  
Messages.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Messages  
Apps  
Print: Send this memo to a Samsung printer.  
.
Messenger  
Send via: Touch Bluetooth Email, Gmail, or  
,
With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends  
together into a simple group conversation.  
Wi-Fi Direct to send the memo by the selected  
From a Home screen, touch  
Messenger  
Apps  
.
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Music Player  
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.  
Note: You may have to touch one or more subfolders before  
you encounter files.  
3. Touch a file to launch it in the associated application, if  
the file is associated with an application.  
Tip: A shortcut to Music Player displays on a Home screen by  
default.  
4. While browsing files, use these controls:  
Up: Display a higher directory.  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Music Player.  
Search: Use the keyboard to enter a search  
term. The current folder is searched and  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player.  
results are displayed. Touch  
search field.  
X
to remove the  
My Files  
Find, view, and manage folders and files, such as music files,  
photo files, video files, and so on, stored on your tablet. If the  
file is associated with an application on your device, you can  
launch the file in the application.  
Display mode: Enable thumbnails for each file.  
– or –  
Enable list mode.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
My Files  
Apps  
.
Root: Display the root directory.  
2. Touch a folder and scroll down or up until you locate a  
file.  
Add Folder: Add a new folder in the current  
folder.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
     
2. Touch Accept to accept the Google Maps Navigation  
Mark files: Touch the box to the left of each file  
or next to the folder to select all files in the  
folder. Then touch send via, copy, cut, or delete  
in the Application Bar.  
beta message.  
3. Touch  
in the Application bar and then touch either  
Driving or Walking to describe the type of directions  
you want.  
5. To view a photo file:  
Touch the file.  
4. Touch  
Map in the Application bar to see a map  
(Driving) or a satellite image (Walking) of your area.  
The Gallery app is used to open the photo. For more information,  
6. To view a video file:  
5. Touch  
Menu for the following options:  
• Route options: Set whether directions should Avoid  
highways and Avoid tolls  
.
Touch the file.  
• Settings: Display Navigation settings:  
The Video Player is launched and plays the video. For more  
Screen dimming: Enable or disable screen dimming, which  
lets the screen dim between instructions to save power.  
Terms, privacy & notices: View Google’s Terms and  
conditions, Privacy policy, and Legal notices.  
Navigation  
Use Google Navigation to find a destination and to get  
walking or driving directions.  
• Help: Display Navigation help information.  
Note: You must first create a Wi-Fi connection to use  
Navigation.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Navigation  
Apps  
.
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. To find a destination, touch an option:  
• Speak destination: Say the name or address of your  
destination.  
Menu: To display these options:  
Turn off voice/Turn on voice: Enable or  
disable voice-guided prompts.  
• Type destination: Enter the destination.  
• Contacts: Choose a destination from a contact record.  
• Starred places: Choose destinations you have marked as  
favorites.  
Exit navigation: Close Navigation and  
discard route information.  
Search: Find a location.  
Set destination: Choose or enter a  
• Recent destinations: Choose from recent destinations. This  
option is available once a destination has been requested.  
destination.  
Settings: Enable or disable screen dimming  
and view Google’s Terms and conditions,  
Privacy policy, and Legal notices.  
7. While navigating, touch:  
ROUTE AND ALTERNATES: View information  
about the current route and alternate routes.  
Help: Display Navigation help information.  
DirectionsList:Viewdirectionsinastep-by-step  
list.  
Photo Editor  
To perfect any photos stored on your tablet, use Photo editor  
to crop, rotate, resize, adjust color and contrast, and much  
more.  
SHOWMAP:Returntothemapviewafterviewing  
ROUTE AND ALTERNATES or the directions list.  
Layers: Choose map layers to display.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Photo editor  
Apps  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
   
To add more books to your library:  
1. Touch Shop in the Application bar.  
A pop-up displays a link to the Google Play™ Terms of  
Play Books  
Use the Play Books app to read eBooks from the Internet-  
based Google Play™ Books service. Google eBooks is a new  
way to discover, buy, and enjoy your favorite books online  
and offline.  
Service.  
2. Read the document and touch Accept  
.
You can read books online or mark them for availability  
offline, so you can read them when you have no Internet  
connection (such as on an airplane). You can also use Books  
as your starting point for browsing or searching for books on  
line.  
The Google Play main screen displays.  
3. Touch Books and browse the selection of Google  
eBooks, which are arranged in categories like  
Featured, New Arrivals in Fiction, New Arrivals in  
Nonfiction, Top Selling, and many more.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Books  
Apps  
.
To find a book by title or author name:  
The Google Play Books main screen displays.  
Touch  
touch SHOP  
Search on the Play Books main screen or  
Search  
.
Note: You may be asked to create or sign on to your Google  
2. Touch the cover of a book to start reading.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatically read aloud: When set, your device  
automatically reads the selected book aloud when the  
application starts, if accessibility is set. For more information,  
Play Books Options  
To view Play Books options:  
From a Home screen, touch  
Play Books Menu  
The following options display:  
• Make available offline: Mark books to make them available  
offline. Touch below a book cover to mark it with a pin and  
. Just reverse this process to remove books  
Apps  
.
• Help: Displays various Book help information. Touch Help  
Center to get additional Google Play Books information.  
Reading a Book  
Once the book displays:  
then touch  
1. Sweep across the screen to turn the page.  
2. Touch the screen to display or hide the following  
options.  
from your device.  
• View as list / View as carousel: Set how you want to view  
your books.  
3. Touch  
for a table of contents.  
• Refresh: If a book in your library does not appear on your  
device, use this option to update the display.  
• Accounts: Set the account to use.  
4. Touch  
to set THEME (day or night), BRIGHTNESS,  
TYPEFACE, FONT SIZE, TEXT ALIGNMENT, and LINE  
HEIGHT.  
• Settings: Use the following settings to customize your Play  
Books application:  
5. Touch  
Search on the Play Books main screen or  
Search  
touch SHOP  
.
Auto-rotate screen: The options are: Use system setting, Lock  
in portrait, and Lock in landscape.  
Download in Wi-Fi only: Use this option to reduce carrier data  
charges.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
 
6. Touch  
Menu for these additional options:  
Flowing text: Display the pages of the book  
7. Touch and drag the slider at the bottom of the page to  
display a different page, which is indicated by the  
pop-up.  
• Original pages  
/
in their original format or use your format settings.  
• About the book: Displays the Google Play description of the  
book.  
8. To contact customer support, report an issue, and  
display more Google eBooks information, from a Home  
screen, touch  
Menu  
Apps  
Help  
Play Books  
• Share: Share the book by using Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,  
Google+, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
.
• Keep on device: Touch the check box to make the book  
available for offline reading.  
Play Magazines  
Google Play Magazines helps you subscribe to your favorite  
magazines so you can have them available to read on your  
tablet at your leisure.  
• Add bookmark / Remove bookmark: Place a bookmark in or  
remove a bookmark from your book.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Magazines  
Apps  
• Read aloud / Stop reading aloud: Touch to let your device  
read the book to you.  
.
2. If necessary, sign in to your Google account.  
• Settings: Use the following settings to customize your Play  
Books application: Auto-rotate screen, Download in Wi-Fi only,  
and Automatically read aloud. For more information, refer to  
3. At the Welcome! screen, touch  
Shop to browse the  
• Help: Touch Help center  
link the appropriate website. Touch Terms of Service  
Policy, or Open source licenses to read those documents. The  
Play Books version number is also displayed.  
,
Contact us, or Report a problem to  
Privacy  
full catalog.  
,
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and touch  
Accept  
.
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view  
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.  
6. Touch a magazine to see more information  
7. Touch Subscribe to subscribe to a magazine.  
– or –  
Play Music  
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
Touch BUY ISSUE to buy the current issue.  
Play Store  
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the  
transaction.  
Google Play Store provides access to downloadable  
applications and games to install on your device. It also  
allows you to provide feedback and comments about an  
application, or flag an application that might be incompatible  
with your device.  
8. Touch  
Menu to manage your subscriptions, refresh  
the page, manage settings, and display help  
information.  
Play Movies & TV  
The Play Movies & TV app is available for select Android  
devices. Any movie you rent from the Google Play™ Store  
can be downloaded for offline viewing through this  
Tip: A shortcut to Play Store displays on the main Home screen  
by default.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Play Store.  
– or –  
application. In addition, the Play Movies & TV app can be  
used to stream your Google Play™ movie rentals as well as  
play any of your personal videos stored on your tablet.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Store.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Movies & TV  
2. For more information touch  
Apps  
.
Menu  
Help.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
           
If you are not already logged in with your Google  
account, the Add a Google Account screen displays.  
Updates to Downloaded Apps  
You can check for new versions of applications by visiting the  
Google Play Store. Items that have a new version available  
Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account, or New  
to create a Google account.  
will say Update  
.
You can also select apps that you would like to be updated  
automatically. To do this:  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch My Apps  
Play Store.  
2. The first time you open Play Store, read the Google  
Play™ Terms of Service, the Google Music Terms of  
Service, the Google Books Terms of Service, and the  
YouTube Rentals Terms of Service, then touch Accept to  
continue.  
.
3. Touch the Installed tab to list the Play Store apps  
installed on your device.  
Update is displayed if there is an update available for  
the app.  
3. To browse for items to install, touch Apps  
,
Games,  
Music Books, or Movies. Touch a tab, such as  
CATEGORIES, FEATURED, TOP PAID, or TOP FREE to  
refine your search.  
,
4. Touch Allow automatic updating on an app to enable  
automatic updating.  
5. Touch Open to open the app on your device.  
6. Touch Update to update the app on your device.  
4. To get help for using Google Play™, touch  
Help  
Menu  
.
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Polaris Office  
Real Racing 2  
Polaris® Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office  
compatible office suite. This application provides a central  
place for managing your documents online or offline.  
Real Racing 2 is a realistic racing game with incredible  
resolution.  
Tip: A shortcut to Real Racing 2 displays on a Home screen by  
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable  
Document Format) files.  
default.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Polaris Office  
Apps  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Real Racing 2  
.
.
– or –  
2. Enter your Email information, if desired, and touch  
Register to complete the process.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Real Racing 2.  
2. The first time you access this game touch DOWNLOAD  
to download the game and play.  
Touch Skip to ignore this registration.  
The main Polaris Office screen displays. Recent  
documents displays a list of recently opened  
documents.  
3. Enjoy the game!  
3. To get help for using Polaris Office, touch  
Help User Guide  
Menu  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
         
S Suggest  
This application provides on-screen recommendations for  
applications that are specifically supported and made for use  
on your device.  
Search  
Search the internet using the GoogleTM search engine.  
Tip: The Google Search widget displays on each Home screen  
by default. For information about displaying widgets on  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
S Suggest  
Apps  
.
The Country or region list displays.  
2. Touch a country or region in the list (for example,  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Google.  
United States) and then touch OK  
.
– or –  
The Terms and conditions display.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Search.  
3. Touch the Agree check box and then touch Agree  
.
2. Use the keyboard to enter search criteria to display  
The S Suggest main screen displays.  
matching searches.  
– or –  
4. Select an application from one of the available  
Touch  
and speak the search criteria slowly and  
categories (Picks, Categories, Games, Friends, and  
clearly. Google searches for the information and  
displays results.  
Info).  
5. Follow the on-screen download and installation  
instructions.  
Suggestions display below the text entry area.  
3. Touch a suggestion to search for that term or touch  
on the keyboard to start the search.  
A browser window displays the search results.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Peel® suggests Top Pick TV shows for you based on what  
you watch and like. Instead of a long, boring channel grid,  
Peel presents an easy-to-use mosaic of your favorite shows,  
filtered by type and genre in the order you like.  
Settings  
Configure your device to your preferences.  
Tip: A shortcut to Settings displays on the main Home screen  
Tip: A shortcut to Smart Remote displays on a Home screen by  
by default.  
default.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Settings.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Smart Remote  
Apps  
.
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
From a Home screen, touch  
Settings.  
Smart Remote  
.
Smart Remote  
The Samsung Disclaimer displays.  
Allows you to locate and watch programming on your TV and  
then control your entertainment system with gestures from  
the device.  
2. Touch Agree  
.
3. Touch Set Up Smart Remote Now: US & Canada  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
For more information, go to: http://www.peel.com  
.
Talk  
Discover and control TV programming right from your device.  
Lose your remotes, once and for all. Quit scrolling those  
tiresome grid guides. See what you want, right at your own  
fingertips: your shows, your controls, your friends.  
Use Google Talk to chat with other Google Talk users.  
From a Home screen, touch Apps Talk.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
             
Task Manager  
Video Maker  
Video Maker lets you custom-make your own videos. You can  
add themes, music, pictures, and other videos to your video.  
View and manage active applications on your device. For  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Video Maker  
2. Touch New Project  
Apps  
From any screen, touch and hold  
Home.  
.
The Task manager pop-up displays. Access Task  
Manager from the Task manager pop-up. For more  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Video Player  
View and manage videos stored on your tablet.  
– or –  
Add the Application monitor widget to a Home screen  
and then touch Application monitor on the Application  
Tip: A shortcut to Video Player displays on a Home screen by  
default.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Video Player.  
Touch  
Navigation and then touch Task manager.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Video Player.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Touch the  
on the pop-up to add the city.  
World Clock  
View the date and time in any time zone.  
5. Touch  
Reorder to change the order of the cities.  
Touch the grid  
new position in the list. Touch Done to change the  
order.  
on an entry and drag the entry to a  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
World Clock  
Apps  
.
A map of the world displays with the locations you  
have added flagged.  
6. Touch  
Remove to delete entries. Touch the box to  
check the cities you want to delete (a green check  
2. Touch  
Add to add a city to display.  
mark displays), then touch Remove  
.
A list of world cities displays in landscape mode.  
7. Touch and hold an entry to remove it or to set the  
DST settings, which enable or disable Daylight Savings  
Time adjustments.  
3. Scroll through the list and touch the city you want to  
add.  
Yahoo! Finance  
Tip: Touch the first letter of the city’s name, to the right of the  
list, to find the city more quickly.  
Stay on top of the markets with the Yahoo! Finance app for  
Android devices. Get real-time quotes, follow the market, or  
check out a particular stock. View headline news, top stories,  
and videos from Tech Ticker. Yahoo! Finance lets you keep up  
with the market movers from your Android phone.  
– or –  
In portrait or landscape mode, touch and turn the globe  
to locate a city and touch the city you want to add.  
To add the Yahoo! Finance widget to a Home screen, see  
A pop-up displays the city name, the current time and  
date there, and the GMT offset.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
         
3. Touch  
Add to add another stock. For more  
Adding Your First Stock  
To add your first stock:  
information, refer to “Adding Your First Stock” on  
page 168.  
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! Finance widget.  
The Yahoo Finance Add screen displays.  
4. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Delete: Touch to delete the stock being displayed.  
• Change order: Displays your stocks list. Touch and drag stocks  
to change the order in which they are displayed.  
• Search: Touch to search for a new stock.  
2. Type in a stock name.  
3. Touch the  
key on the keyboard to start the search  
and touch an entry in the list of stocks that is  
displayed.  
• Settings: Displays the following option:  
4. The Yahoo! Finance widget displays with information  
about the stock just added.  
Auto refresh: Choose a time interval for automatic refreshing  
of stock information. The choices are: None, Every 30 minutes,  
Every 1 hour, and Every 3 hours. When the setting is None,  
touch the refresh icon on the Yahoo! Finance widget to update  
stock information.  
Managing Stocks  
Once you add a stock, there are additional Yahoo! Finance  
options you can use to add more stocks and set up how they  
are displayed and refreshed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch an entry in the Yahoo!  
Finance widget.  
5. Under the My Stocks tab, touch a stock entry to display  
the full stock information screen.  
6. Touch the Major indices tab to display a summary of  
the performance of major groupings of stocks,  
classified by the exchange on which they trade.  
7. Touch the Currencies tab to display the currency  
exchange rate for various currencies.  
Information about the stock displays.  
2. Touch  
Refresh to update the information.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Options  
There are more options available from the full stock  
Yahoo! News  
Display current news and much more from Yahoo!  
information screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! Finance widget.  
To add the Yahoo! News widget to a Home screen, see  
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! News widget.  
The full stock information screen for one of your stocks  
displays.  
The first time you connect, the Select news by country  
screen displays.  
2. If you have added more than one stock, touch a  
heading bar to display the full stock information screen  
for the stock.  
Touch a country and then touch Done  
.
Touch the Yahoo! News widget again.  
3. Near the center of the screen, touch 1d (1 day),  
5d (5 days), 1m (1 month), 3m (3 months),  
6m (6 months), or 1y (1 year) to view a stock  
performance graph for the requested period.  
4. At the bottom, right of the screen, touch Y! More  
Information to link to the Yahoo! Finance website.  
5. At the bottom of the screen, touch Quotes delayed to  
read about real-time exchange quotes and access  
other Yahoo! Finance online options, such as Top  
Stories and a currency converter.  
The Yahoo! News screen displays.  
2. Touch and swipe the tabs left or right to see all the  
categories such as Top Stories, Business,  
Entertainment, Sports, and so on.  
3. Touch a tab to view that category.  
4. Touch a news item to read the full story online.  
5. To refresh the news items, touch  
6. Touch Settings to personalize your Yahoo! News  
settings.  
Refresh.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
   
6. While browsing, touch  
Menu for these options:  
YouTube  
• Sign in / Sign out: Sign in, sign out, or add an account. You  
may have to sign in to use certain options.  
View and upload YouTube videos right from your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
YouTube  
.
• Settings: Configure display and search settings and view  
information about the application.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
• Help: Display YouTube help information.  
YouTube.  
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.  
7. Touch a video thumbnail to view the video.  
Options While Viewing a Video  
2. Touch the HOME tab to return to the main YouTube  
page.  
3. Touch the BROWSE tab to browse videos by categories  
like Comedy, Education, Music, and so on. Touch the  
desired category to display video thumbnails.  
4. Touch the ACCOUNT tab to choose which Google  
account you would like to use or add an account. Once  
you are signed in, touch ACCOUNT to display your  
subscriptions, see your favorites, see you watch later  
list, manage your playlists, or upload a video.  
Use these options while viewing a video:  
1. Touch  
Add to, which lets you add the video to your  
watch later list or your favorites, or add a new playlist.  
2. Touch  
Share to use Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi  
Direct, Gmail, or Email to send the video’s URL.  
3. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
• Add YouTube TV: Control your YouTube TV screen from your  
tablet. Touch Show me how for instructions and a list of  
devices that support YouTube on TV.  
5. Touch  
enter a keyword or phrase to find a YouTube video.  
Touch on the keyboard to initiate the search.  
Search YouTube and use the keyboard to  
• Copy URL: Copy the URL of the video to the clipboard. For  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Flag: Flag the video for YouTube review.  
• Settings: Configure display and search settings and view  
information about the application.  
3. Read the introduction information and touch Continue.  
4. Your location is found using GPS. Touch OK to allow YP  
to use your current location.  
• Help: Display YouTube help information.  
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.  
5. Enter a subject or business name, city, and state in the  
Search  
search field and touch  
Results display.  
Search.  
YPmobile  
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready  
6. Touch a location, if more than one displays.  
7. Touch one of the following:  
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your  
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local  
• Map: Display this location marked with a pin on the map. Pinch  
the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it outwards to  
zoom in.  
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your  
search in real-time.  
• Directions: Get directions using AT&T Navigator, Browser, or  
Maps.  
Note: The first time you use YPmobile, you will need to  
download the updated application from Play Store.  
When the Play Store page displays, touch Update or  
Install then follow the on-screen instructions. For more  
• Share: Shares this information with Facebook, Twitter, or using  
Email.  
• Save: Saves this location to My Stuff or to the Address Book.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
YPmobile  
Apps  
.
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and  
touch Accept to continue.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
     
3. Read the Permissions and touch Accept & download to  
Zinio  
continue.  
Use the Zinio app to download and read your favorite  
magazines. You can browse for magazines, download  
subscriptions or single issues, and sync your magazines on  
multiple devices.  
4. Touch Allow automatic updating if you want this  
application to automatically update  
– or –  
Touch Open if the application was already installed and  
updated.  
Note: The first time you use Zinio, you will need to download  
the updated application from the Play Store. When the  
Play Store page displays, touch Update or Install then  
follow the on-screen instructions. For more information,  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
6. For more information touch  
Help  
Menu  
Settings  
.
Tip: A shortcut to Zinio displays on a Home screen by default.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Zinio.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Zinio.  
The Zinio screen displays from the Play Store.  
2. Touch Update to update the software.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 9: Settings  
This section explains Settings for customizing your device.  
Accessing Settings  
Wireless and Network  
Control your device’s wireless connections.  
Wi-Fi  
Your device supports Wi-Fi b/g/n. Use Wi-Fi settings to  
manage your device’s Wi-Fi connections.  
To access Settings:  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Settings.  
For more information about using your device’s Wi-Fi  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings.  
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off  
– or –  
When you turn Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically  
searches for available, in-range Wireless Access Points  
(WAPs).  
From any screen, touch the Time in the System Bar,  
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch  
Wi-Fi from the Quick Settings menu.  
The Settings screen displays.  
The Settings Screen  
The Settings screen has tabs on the left side of the screen.  
Information related to the tabs displays on the right side of  
the screen. There are four major groups of settings: Wireless  
and network, Device, Personal, and System.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings. On the Wi-Fi tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on or off.  
Settings  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Add Wi-Fi Network  
Advanced Settings  
To open a dialog where you can add a Wi-Fi network by  
entering its Network SSID (the name it broadcasts), security  
type, and other properties:  
Set up and manage wireless access points.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Wi-Fi  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Wi-Fi, and then touch Add Wi-Fi network  
2. Use the keyboard to enter Network SSID  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch  
Menu  
Advanced.  
The following options display:  
.
• Network notification: Have your device alert you to new  
Wireless Access Points (WAPs). Touch Network notification to  
turn notifications On or Off. When enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box.  
3. Touch the Security field and then touch a security type.  
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP,  
additional network information may be required, such as  
a Password.  
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: Specify when to disconnect from  
Wi-Fi. Option are: Always, Only when plugged in, or Never.  
• MAC address: View your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: View your device’s IP address.  
4. If necessary, touch Password and enter the password or  
hex key.  
5. Touch Save  
.
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Bluetooth Settings  
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.  
Bluetooth  
Use Bluetooth settings to manage Bluetooth connections, set  
your device’s name, and control your device’s visibility.  
Turning Bluetooth On or Off  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Bluetooth  
Apps  
Settings  
.
To turn your device’s Bluetooth service On or Off:  
2. Touch Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices.  
After searching, touch a device to pair with it. For more  
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch  
Bluetooth from the Quick Settings menu.  
3. Touch  
configure:  
Menu and select a Bluetooth setting to  
– or –  
• Rename device: Your device’s default name displays on  
screen. Touch to change the device name. Available when  
Bluetooth is turned On.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings. On the Bluetooth tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Bluetooth on or off.  
• Visible time-out: Use this setting to control when to  
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5  
minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.  
For more information about using Bluetooth to exchange  
• Received files: Show the list of files received by using  
Bluetooth.  
Settings  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Press and hold the Power button then touch Airplane  
mode  
More Settings  
This tab displays additional wireless and network  
.
information.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
More settings  
Apps  
Settings  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
.
More settings  
Airplane mode and then touch OK to  
Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks,  
Wi-Fi Direct, Data usage, VPN, Kies via Wi-Fi, and  
Nearby devices.  
turn on Airplane mode. A check mark  
the check box when Airplane mode is On.  
appears in  
Mobile Networks  
Airplane Mode  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Mobile networks options.  
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your tablet’s  
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are  
in an airplane or in any other area where accessing data is  
prohibited.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings Mobile networks  
The following options display:  
• Mobile data: Activates the data network. Must be set to On  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Important! When your tablet is in Airplane Mode, it cannot  
access online information or applications.  
(default). A check mark  
Mobile data mode is On.  
appears in the check box when  
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch  
Airplane mode from the Quick Settings menu.  
• Data Roaming: Connects to your service provider’s partner  
networks and accesses data services when you are out of your  
service providers area of coverage.  
– or –  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Access Point Names: Provides access to a wireless access  
point (hotspot).  
Wi-Fi Direct  
You can configure your device to connect directly with other  
Wi-Fi capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data  
between devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi  
Direct communication. This connection is direct and not via a  
hot spot or WAP connection.  
• Network operators: Displays the current network connection.  
You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or  
set the network selection to Automatic.  
2. Touch Network operators  
.
The current network connection displays at the bottom  
of the list.  
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching  
Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi  
for an available network.  
network connection.  
3. Touch Default setup and select:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings Wi-Fi Direct  
OFF / ON icon to activate Wi-Fi  
Apps  
Settings  
• Automatic: to automatically select a network connection.  
• Manual: to manually search for a network.  
.
2. Touch the  
Direct.  
Note: Connecting to 2G/3G networks slows the data transfer  
speed and time.  
Your device begins to search for other devices enabled  
with Wi-Fi direct connections.  
3. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct tab to display Available devices.  
Settings  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. When scanning is complete, touch a device name to  
begin the connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct  
compatible device.  
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also  
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of  
data usage by application.  
Important! The target device must have Wi-Fi Direct service  
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider  
active and running before your device can detect it.  
may account for data usage differently.  
The direct connection establishes, the status field  
displays “Connected”, and your connected device is  
displayed in the Wi-Fi Direct devices listing.  
VPN  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage  
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).  
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and  
Data Usage  
configure one.  
From this screen you can view the Wi-Fi or Ethernet data  
usage.  
Adding a VPN  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings Data usage.  
Apps  
Settings  
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN  
protocol to use: PPTP, L2TP/IPSec PSK, L2TP/IPSec RSA,  
IPSec Xauth PSK, IPSec Xauth RSA, or IPSec Hybrid RSA.  
2. Touch Mobile data to enable or disable the mobile data  
connection.  
Note: You must also set a screen unlock PIN or password  
before you can use credential storage. For more  
3. Touch Set mobile data limit to disable your mobile data  
connection when your specified limit is reached.  
4. Touch the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and  
select a date.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Edit a VPN  
More settings  
VPN  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Basic VPN  
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit.  
Settings  
Settings  
More settings  
VPN  
.
2. Touch Basic VPN  
Add VPN network  
.
3. In the form that appears, fill in the information provided  
by your network administrator.  
3. In the pop-up that opens, touch Edit network  
.
4. Touch Save to save your VPN settings.  
4. Make the desired VPN setting changes.  
5. Touch Save  
.
Adding a VPN Client  
To add a full-featured VPN Client that provides support for the  
latest IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with  
support for all major VPN Gateways:  
Delete a VPN  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings VPN  
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete.  
Apps  
Basic VPN  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings VPN  
Apps  
Settings  
Advanced IPsec VPN.  
3. In the pop-up that opens, touch Delete network  
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the VPN  
Kies via Wi-Fi  
This feature provides Wi-Fi configuration and usage by Kies  
Air.  
Client.  
Connecting To a VPN  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings VPN  
Apps  
Basic VPN.  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
.
Settings  
More settings Kies via Wi-Fi  
2. Touch the VPN to which you want to connect.  
3. In the pop-up that opens, enter any requested  
credentials.  
2. Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.  
4. Touch Connect  
.
Settings  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Nearby Devices  
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby  
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) enabled devices.  
• Not-allowed devices list: Indicate the devices not accessible  
to your device.  
• Download to: Set whether to download data to USB storage or  
SD card.  
Warning! If file sharing is enabled, other devices can access  
your data. Use the Wi-Fi network and this option with  
care.  
• Upload from other devices: If a nearby device attempts to  
upload data, this setting indicates the response. Options are:  
Always accept, Always ask, and Always reject.  
To configure this option:  
Device  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings Nearby devices  
2. Touch File sharing to turn File sharing on.  
Apps  
.
Settings  
This section of the Settings screen contains settings for your  
device.  
Sound  
General  
A check mark  
sharing is On.  
appears in the check box when File  
Set the volume level for all types of sounds.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound Volume  
2. Touch and drag the sliders to set the volume for:  
• Music video games and other media: Sounds made by  
Apps  
Settings  
3. In the Advanced section, set the following options:  
• Shared contents: Select the content to share. Choices are:  
Videos, Photos, and Music.  
.
,
,
,
• Device name: Enter the name for your device. The default is  
the model number: SAMSUNG-SGH-I497.  
music apps, video apps, and more.  
• Notifications: Sounds for alerts to new messages and other  
events.  
• Allowed devices list: Indicate the devices accessible to your  
device.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• System: Application sounds and other sounds made by your  
System  
device.  
You can activate or deactivate both touch and screen lock  
sounds.  
Tip: You can also set System volume from the Home screen by  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound  
Apps  
Settings  
pressing the Volume Key.  
.
2. Touch Touch sounds or Screen lock sound (both default  
3. Touch OK to save your settings.  
to On).  
Notifications  
Select a default ringtone for message, alarm, and other  
notifications.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Display  
Brightness  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound Default notifications.  
Apps  
Settings  
Set the default screen brightness.  
2. Touch a ringtone to hear a sample and select it.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
3. Touch OK to save the setting.  
Display  
2. Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or touch  
Automatic brightness  
3. Touch OK to save the setting.  
Brightness.  
.
Settings  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Screen Timeout  
Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen  
touch and the automatic screen timeout (dim and lock).  
2. Touch Auto-rotate screen to enable or disable the  
auto-rotate feature  
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Tip: Touch the Time in the System Bar to display the Quick  
Settings pop-up. Touch Screen rotation to enable or  
disable the auto-rotate feature. For more information,  
2. Touch Screen timeout and select the screen delay time.  
The screen delays shutting off after inactivity for the  
selected period of time.  
Auto-Rotate Screen  
Font Style and Size  
Set the font for screen displays and the size you want it to  
display.  
When this option is checked, the screen orientation changes  
when you rotate the device. When this option is not checked,  
the screen orientation locks in the current orientation  
(landscape or portrait) and the orientation does not change  
when you rotate the device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
2. Touch Font style then touch a font or touch Get fonts  
online to browse and download a new font.  
3. Touch Font size and select a font size.  
.
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Quick Launch  
Wallpaper  
The Quick Launch feature allows you to set multifunctional  
softkey to open applications.  
You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen,  
Lock screen, or to both the Home and lock screens. Choose  
from preloaded wallpaper images or select a photo you have  
downloaded or taken with the Camera.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
2. Touch Quick launch  
3. Touch None Screen capture  
Camera  
Apps  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Wallpaper  
2. Touch Home screen  
screens  
The Select wallpaper from screen displays the  
following options: Gallery Live wallpapers, and  
Wallpapers  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
,
,
Applications, Search, or  
,
Lock screen, or Home and lock  
.
.
If you choose Screen capture, touch the softkey to  
capture an image of the current screen and edit the  
image. Touch and hold to capture and add an image of  
the current screen to the clipboard.  
,
.
The screen image is saved in the /Root/sdcard/  
Pictures/Screenshots folder. For more information,  
Settings  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SD Card  
Power Saving  
When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the  
Once a memory card has been installed in your device,  
the SD card memory displays as Total space and  
Available space.  
screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Power saving  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Mounting an SD Card  
2. On the Power saving tab, touch the  
OFF / ON  
icon to turn Power saving on or off.  
3. Turn Power saving on and touch the Power saving  
mode settings (CPU power saving or Screen power  
saving) to enable or disable them.  
2. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
Apps  
Settings  
Settings  
.
3. Touch Mount SD card  
.
4. Touch Learn about power saving to display more  
information about saving power.  
Unmounting an SD Card  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
2. Touch Unmount SD card  
Apps  
Storage  
.
From this menu you can view the device memory or mount,  
.
unmount, or format an SD card.  
3. At the prompt, select OK to safely unmount the memory  
Device Memory  
card.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
Apps  
Settings  
4. Remove the SD card from the slot. For more  
.
The Device memory displays as Total space, Apps,  
Pictures, videos, Audio, Downloads, Miscellaneous  
files, and Available space.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Touch Screen or Android System to view how the  
display and the Android system are affecting battery  
use.  
Note: Unmounting an SD card will stop some applications  
from functioning. Applications may not be available until  
you mount the SD card again.  
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery  
Formatting an SD Card  
use.  
When formatting an SD card you will want to backup your  
music and photo files that are stored on the card because  
formatting the SD card deletes all the stored data.  
Application Manager  
You can download and install applications from Google Play  
or create applications using the Android SDK and install them  
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage  
applications.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Format SD card and then touch Format SD card  
again on the warning screen.  
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or  
any other company, end-users operate these devices  
at their own risk.  
3. Touch Delete all  
Battery  
See how much battery power is used for device activities.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings  
Battery  
.
.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount  
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery  
usage displays in percentages per application.  
Settings  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Usage  
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running  
applications.  
4. Touch an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Application manager  
Apps  
Settings  
The following options are displayed:  
.
• Force stop: Stops an app that is misbehaving. Restart your  
device if stopping an app, process, or service causes your  
device to stop working correctly.  
2. Touch Downloaded or Running to display memory  
usage for that category of applications.  
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows  
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom  
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.  
• Uninstall: Deletes the application from the tablet.  
• Clear data: Clears application data from memory.  
Downloaded  
• Clear cache: If the app stores data in a temporary area of the  
device's memory, and the amount of information stored is  
displayed, touch this button to clearing the temporary storage.  
• Clear defaults: If you have configured an app to launch  
certain file types by default, clear that setting.  
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Application manager  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Downloaded to view a list of all the downloaded  
applications on your device.  
• Permissions: Lists the kinds of information about your device  
and data to which the app has access.  
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the  
Downloaded tabs, touch Touch  
size or Sort by name  
Menu  
Sort by  
.
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running Services  
• Report: Report failure and other application information.  
View and control services running on your device.  
Note: Options vary by application.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Application manager  
2. Touch the Running tab.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Personal  
This section of the Settings screen lets you manage the  
personal settings for your device.  
All the applications that are currently running on the  
device display.  
Accounts and Sync  
Set up and manage accounts, including your Google and  
email accounts.  
3. Touch Show cached processes to display all the cached  
processes that are running. Touch Show services in use  
to switch back.  
Adding an Account  
4. Touch one of the applications to view application  
information.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
2. Touch Add account  
3. Touch one of the account types.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
The following options display:  
.
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is  
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.  
4. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your  
credentials and set up the account.  
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services  
may have undesirable consequences on the  
application or Android System.  
Tip: For more information about the types of accounts that you  
Settings  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Removing an Account  
3. On the Auto sync field, touch the  
OFF / ON icon  
to turn Auto sync on or off, which controls whether  
changes you make to information on your device or on  
the web are automatically synced with each other.  
Data and Synchronization  
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its  
messages, contacts, and other data from the  
device.  
To sync account information manually:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
2. Touch an account to display its settings.  
3. Touch Remove account, then touch Remove account  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
2. Touch an account to display its settings.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
3. Touch Sync Now to synchronize all data for the selected  
at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its  
messages, contacts, and other data.  
account.  
– or –  
Synchronizing Account  
Under Data and synchronization, touch the account  
data to synchronize, such as, Calendar, Contacts,  
Email, and so on.  
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account  
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Sync all to synchronize all your accounts. Touch  
Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Signing In to your Samsung Account  
Several applications and options require that you create and  
sign in to a Samsung Account.  
Touch Privacy policy to display the Samsung Privacy Policy.  
Touch I accept all the terms above and then touch Agree to  
continue or touch  
sync screen.  
Back to return to the Accounts and  
To sign in to your Samsung account:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
– or –  
If you do have a Samsung account, touch Sign in  
The Samsung account screen displays.  
5. Use the keyboard to enter the required information and  
touch Sign up or Sign in  
Accounts and sync.  
.
2. Touch  
Add account and then touch  
Samsung account  
.
The Samsung account sign in screen displays.  
.
3. Touch variety of services to display information about  
Samsung services that are available.  
Tip: The password is for your Samsung account, not the  
password you use for the email address you are entering.  
Plus, you can use only letters, numbers, !, @, $, %, &, ^,  
and * for your Samsung account password.  
4. If you have no Samsung account:  
Touch Create new account.  
The Country list of countries displays.  
Touch a country in the list (for example, United States) and  
The Accounts and sync screen displays with your  
Samsung Account listed under Manage accounts.  
touch OK  
.
The Samsung account Terms and conditions screen displays.  
Settings  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Location and Google Search  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Location Services  
Apps  
Settings  
You value your privacy. So, by default, your device only  
acquires your location when you allow it. To use  
Location-Based Services, you must first enable location  
services on your device.  
Location services.  
2. Touch Location and Google search to use your location  
data for improved Google Search results and other  
Google services.  
Use Wireless Networks  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Use wireless networks option or enable the GPS  
satellites.  
Security  
Screen Lock  
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more  
information about using the lock and unlock features, see  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Location services  
Apps  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
2. Touch Use wireless networks to enable location  
information using the wireless network.  
Use GPS Satellites  
.
2. Touch Screen lock for these settings:  
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
• Face unlock: Look at your tablet to unlock it. Follow the  
on-screen instructions to set up Face unlock.  
Location services  
.
2. Touch Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.  
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create  
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or  
change your screen unlock pattern.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.  
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.  
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required.  
Lock Screen Options  
You can customize the Lock screen with the lock screen  
options.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
Note: Additional options are available only if you set Screen  
lock to display the lock screen (any setting other than  
Swipe or None).  
.
2. Touch Lock screen options and set the following  
options:  
• Shortcuts: Touch the  
deactivate the shortcuts on the lock screen.  
• Clock: Activate or deactivate the Lock screen clock. When  
OFF / ON icon to activate or  
With Swipe Lock  
Display a lock screen that has to be swiped and then display  
a lock screen on which the face unlock, pattern, PIN, or  
password has to be entered.  
enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box.  
• Dual clock: Touch the  
option on or off. This option shows a dual clock on the lock  
screen when roaming.  
OFF / ON icon to turn this  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch the With swipe lock check box to activate or  
• Help text: Display help text on the lock screen.  
deactivate the option.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Settings  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lock Automatically  
Use this option to set how quickly to lock the screen after the  
screen automatically turns off.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Owner information and then touch Show owner  
info on lock screen to enable or disable the option.  
3. Touch the text field and use the keyboard to enter the  
text to display on the lock screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Lock automatically and touch an option.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Options are: Immediately; 5, 15, or 30 seconds; 1, 2, 5,  
10, or 30 minutes.  
Encryption  
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your tablet  
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD  
card each time it is connected:  
Lock Instantly With Power Key  
Use this option to enable the lock screen when the power key  
is pressed. If this option is not enabled, the screen dims or  
brightens when the power key is pressed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Encrypt device. For more information, read the  
displayed help screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Lock instantly with power key  
Apps  
Settings  
.
3. Touch Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption  
on SD card data that requires a password be entered  
each time the microSD card is connected.  
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Owner Information  
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.  
Use this option to enable or disable whether to show owner  
information on the lock screen.  
Encryption takes an hour or more.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory Data Reset Password  
To set up or change a password that will have to be entered  
to perform a Factory Data Reset:  
3. Touch Lock SIM card to use a PIN code to prevent  
another user from using or accessing information  
stored on your SIM card.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Set up/change password  
3. Touch numbers through to create or change the  
password, which must be 4 to 8 digits long.  
4. Touch Confirm  
Apps  
Settings  
Enter your SIM PIN code, then touch OK  
.
.
4. Touch Change SIM PIN to change your SIM PIN code.  
.
Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK  
Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
Re-enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
.
0
9
.
.
.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change  
5. Re-enter the password and touch Confirm again.  
your SIM PIN code.  
Note: The password does not get reset when a Factory Data  
Passwords  
Reset is performed.  
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you  
touch them while entering passwords.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
SIM Card Lock  
.
The SIM Card Lock feature allows you to require a PIN  
number to unlock your SIM card.  
2. Touch Make passwords visible to enable or disable brief  
displays of password characters.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Set up SIM card lock  
Apps  
Settings  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
.
.
Settings  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Device Administration  
Credential Storage  
To add or remove device administrators:  
Trusted Credentials  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Device administrators  
Apps  
Settings  
Settings  
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or  
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or  
remove it.  
.
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Trusted credentials  
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:  
Apps  
Settings  
Enable or disable installation of non-Google Play  
applications.  
.
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Unknown sources.  
An informational pop-up displays.  
Apps  
.
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed  
in the ROM of your device.  
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for  
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.  
3. Touch a CA certificate to examine its details.  
A scrolling screen displays the details.  
3. Read the message and touch OK to allow installation of  
non-Google Play applications.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and touch  
Warning! Enabling this option causes your tablet and personal  
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications  
from unknown sources.  
Disable to disable a System certificate.  
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable  
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the  
certificate again, if necessary.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Touch OK to return to the certificate list.  
Language and Input  
Language  
Set the language used by your device.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Settings  
Install from Device Storage  
Language and input  
Language.  
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.  
2. Touch a language / locale from the list.  
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing  
Keyboards and Input Methods  
Set the keyboard used by your device.  
encrypted certificates to use this feature.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Language and input  
2. Touch Default and select a keyboard.  
Apps  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
2. Touch Install from device storage, then choose a  
Samsung keyboard is the only selection available for  
this device.  
certificate and follow the prompts to install.  
Clear Credentials  
3. Touch Configure input methods  
.
Clear stored credentials.  
4. Touch Google voice typing to automatically use Google  
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted  
voice typing.  
certificates.  
5. Touch  
next to Google voice typing, then touch  
Select input languages  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Clear credentials to remove all certificates.  
Apps  
Settings  
6. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a  
.
language from the list.  
Settings  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Touch Block offensive words to enable or disable  
blocking of recognized offensive words from the results  
of your voice-input Google searches.  
Word completion point: Choose the number of letters for the  
system to use to predict words for automatic completion.  
Spell correction: Enable or disable automatic spell checking  
and correction.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Next word prediction: When enabled, the system predicts the  
next word based on common usage patterns.  
Auto-append: When enabled, the most common predicted  
word is automatically added to your text.  
Configuring the Samsung Keyboard  
To configure the Samsung keyboard:  
Touch  
next to Samsung keyboard to display the  
Auto-substitution: When enabled, the system automatically  
replaces words you enter with words from the XT9 auto-  
substitution list.  
following options:  
• Input language: Used to set a default text entry language.  
Touch this field, scroll through the options, and touch the  
desired input language. When activated, a check appears in  
the box.  
Regional correction: When enabled, the system automatically  
changes the spelling of words based on norms for your locale.  
Recapture: When enabled, the system re-displays matching  
words when you make corrections to a word inserted by the  
system.  
• Predictive text: Enable or disable XT9 predictive text. When  
enabled the system suggests words matching your text entries,  
and, optionally, completes common words automatically. When  
XT9 is enabled, touch the Predictive text field to set the  
following options:  
Auto substitution list: Manage the list of words the system  
uses for auto-substitution (Auto-substitution setting must be  
enabled).  
Word completion: Enable or disable automatic word  
• My word list: Add words to your XT9 predictive text dictionary.  
completion for words matching your text entries.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• T9 Trace: Enable this option to type words by swiping between  
• Auto capitalization: Enable or disable auto-capitalization.  
When enabled, the system automatically capitalizes words in  
your text based on common usage, such as at the beginning of  
sentences.  
• Handwriting: Touch to display the following options:  
• Auto-punctuate: Enable or disable automatic insertion of a  
“full stop” (period and space to end a sentence) by touching the  
space bar twice.  
Recognition time: Set the recognition time to 100, 300, 500,  
1000, or 2000 milliseconds.  
Pen thickness: Set the pen thickness to 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 pixels.  
Pen color: Choose a pen color.  
• Character preview: Check to display an automatic preview of  
the current character selection within the text string. This is  
helpful when multiple characters are available within one key.  
• Key-tap sound: Check to play a brief sound each time you  
touch a key on the on-screen keyboard.  
Recognition type: Set the recognition after each stroke or after  
completion.  
Gesture guide: Displays examples of the various gestures that  
can be used to edit handwriting.  
Tutorial: Displays help for using the Samsung keyboard and  
XT9 predictive text.  
Tutorial: Help for using Handwriting recognition.  
About: Displays information about the handwriting software.  
• Reset settings: Reset keyboard settings except XT9 my words  
and auto-substitution.  
• Voice input: Enable or disable the Voice input feature. When  
enabled, you can choose to enter text by speaking the words,  
using Google’s networked speech recognition feature.  
Settings  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speech  
4. Under General, configure the following:  
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.  
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis  
(available if voice data is installed).  
Set the speech settings for Voice search.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Language and input  
2. Touch Voice search to configure:  
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Driving mode: Touch the  
OFF / ON icon to enable  
or disable this option. When enabled, new notifications are read  
aloud.  
• SafeSearch: Set the sensitivity for filtering of explicit images  
from the results of your voice-input Google searches.  
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of  
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input  
Google searches.  
Once enabled, touch Driving mode to set which notifications to  
read aloud. Choices are: New email, Alarm, Schedule, and Unlock  
screen.  
When an option is enabled, a check mark  
check box.  
appears in the  
Voice output provides audible readout of text, for example,  
the contents of email messages.  
Mouse/Trackpad  
This option sets your Pointer speed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Language and input  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Language and input.  
2. Touch Text-to-speech output and select the preferred  
2. Touch Pointer speed then drag the slide to the right to  
go faster or to the left to go slower.  
TTS engine.  
3. Touch  
configure.  
next to the preferred TTS engine and  
3. Touch OK to save your setting.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Restore  
Back Up and Reset  
Backup and Restore  
Back Up My Data  
When enabled, backed-up settings are restored when you  
reinstall an application.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Back up and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
Enable or disable backup of your information to the Google  
server.  
.
2. Touch Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic  
restoration of settings from the Google server.  
Personal Data  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Backup and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Back up my data to enable or disable back up of  
application data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other settings  
to the Google server.  
Factory Data Reset  
Use Factory data reset to return your device to its factory  
defaults. This setting erases all data from the device,  
including Google or other email account settings, system and  
application data and settings, and downloaded applications,  
as well as your music, photos, videos, and other files. If you  
reset the tablet in this way, the next time you turn on your  
tablet you are prompted to reenter the same kind of  
information as when you first started Android.  
Backup Account  
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the  
Backup account option is available.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Back up and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Backup account and touch your Google Gmail  
account or touch Add account to set your Google Gmail  
account to be backed up to the Google server.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Backup and reset  
2. Touch Factory data reset  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset  
information.  
Settings  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Touch Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform  
the reset.  
HDMI  
To set the HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) audio  
setting:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessory  
2. Touch Audio output  
If you have set up a Factory Data Reset Password, the  
Password screen displays and the password must be  
entered.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
3. Touch Stereo or Surround to set the audio output  
setting.  
System  
Date and Time  
Accessory  
By default, your device receives date and time information  
from the wireless network. When you are outside network  
coverage, you may want to set date and time information  
manually using the Date & time settings.  
Dock  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessory  
2. Touch Dock sound  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Date and time  
2. Configure the following settings:  
Apps  
Settings  
The tablet will not play sounds when inserting and  
removing the device from the dock when enabled.  
.
• Automatic date and time: Allows the network to set the date  
and time.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
• Set date: Enter the current date (only available when the  
Automatic setting is disabled).  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Set time: Enter the current time (only available when the  
Automatic setting is disabled).  
System  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Configure the following settings:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Automatic time zone: Allows the network to set the time  
zone.  
• Auto-rotate screen: Automatically rotates the screen from  
landscape to portrait orientation and vice versa.  
• Speak passwords: Speaks passwords to enter them.  
• Accessibility shortcut: Add a shortcut to Accessibility settings  
that displays when you press and hold the Power key.  
• Screen timeout: Select the screen delay time The screen  
delays shutting off after inactivity for the selected period of  
time.  
• Select time zone: Touch a time zone to select it.  
• Use 24-hour format: The tablet default is a 12-hour clock. Use  
this setting to change to a 24-hour format.  
• Select date format: Set the format for date displays.  
Accessibility  
Accessibility services are special features to make using the  
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use  
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.  
• Lock automatically: Lock the screen after it automatically  
turns off. Options are: Immediately; 5, 15, or 30 seconds; or  
1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 minutes.  
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Google  
Play and manage their use here.  
Note: The Lock automatically option only appears depending on  
Settings  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Services  
Vision  
Enable or disable accessibility services.  
To install Web scripts:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Note: You must activate Accessibility before enabling services.  
Accessibility  
.
2. Touch Install Web scripts  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Touch TalkBack to activate TalkBack.  
Apps  
Settings  
3. Touch Allow to allow applications to install scripts from  
.
Google that make their Web content more accessible.  
To set the font size:  
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
to help blind and low-vision users.  
Accessibility  
.
2. Touch Font size  
.
3. Touch the Gray box next to Settings to turn on TalkBack  
3. Touch a font size. Options are: Tiny, Small, Normal,  
and select OK  
.
Large, and Huge.  
Hearing  
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,  
except passwords, including personal data and  
credit card numbers. It may also log your user  
interface interactions with the device.  
When Mono audio is enabled, you can listen through one  
earphone to mono audio sound.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Touch Mono audio  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To turn off all sounds including receiver voice:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Accessibility  
2. Touch Turn off all sounds  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
2. Touch USB debugging to enable or disable the setting.  
Apps  
Settings  
Settings  
.
.
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Development Device ID  
The identification number for your tablet when using it as a  
development tool displays in this field.  
Mobility  
This option allows you to set the Tap and hold delay time.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings  
Accessibility  
Allow Mock Locations  
This setting is used by developers when developing  
location-based applications.  
.
2. Touch Tap and hold delay, and then touch a delay time.  
Options are: Short, Medium, and Long.  
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.  
Developer Options  
Set options for application development.  
USB Debugging  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Allow mock locations to enable or disable the  
When enabled, allows debugging when the device is  
attached to a PC by a USB cable.  
setting.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.  
Settings  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Desktop Backup Password  
• Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen.  
• Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they  
update.  
Protect the desktop with a backup password ID.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
2. Touch Desktop backup password  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.  
• Force GPU rendering: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.  
• Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation  
(ranges from off to 10x).  
.
3. In the Settings screen, enter the current full backup  
password, the new password for full backups, then  
enter the new password again.  
Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for  
transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).  
4. Touch Set backup password to save the password  
change.  
Apps  
User Interface  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Configure the user interface by setting the behavior for the  
way the screen behaves when using applications or  
displaying data.  
Developer options  
.
2. Touch Do not keep activities to destroy every activity as  
soon as the application is closed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
Apps  
Settings  
3. Touch Limit background processes to set the number of  
processes that can run in the background. Options are:  
Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4  
processes at most.  
.
2. Touch the check box next to each option to enable:  
• Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications  
perform long operations on the main thread.  
4. Touch Show all ANRs to display a prompt when  
applications running in the background are not  
responding.  
• Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched  
on the screen.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Kernel version: Display the kernel version of your device.  
About Device  
View information about your device, including status, legal  
information, hardware and software versions, and battery  
use.  
• Build number: Display your device’s build number.  
Software Update  
The Software Update feature enables you to use your device  
to connect to the network and download any new software  
directly to your device. The device automatically updates  
with the latest available software when you access this  
option.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
About device  
2. Touch items to view details:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Software update: Connect to the network and download new  
• Status: Shows the status of the battery, network, and other  
information.  
Software Update Options  
To check for a software update:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
About device  
2. Touch Software update  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Legal information: Display Open source licenses  
legal, and License settings information.  
,
Google  
.
The AT&T Software update screen displays.  
Tip: To find your device’s DivX® registration code and  
3. Touch the Check for updates field.  
information about registering your device to play DivX  
®
The AT&T Software update screen displays.  
protected video, touch License settings  
DivX VOD  
.
4. Touch OK to check the AT&T server for new software  
update.  
• Model number: Display your device’s model number.  
• Android version: Display the firmware version of your device.  
• Baseband version: Display the baseband version loaded on  
this handset.  
Your device is connected to the server and a search is  
performed for a software update.  
Settings  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Section 10: Health and Safety Information  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with  
using your Galaxy Tab. The terms “GALAXY” or “mobile  
device” are used in this section to refer to your Galaxy Tab.  
Read this information before using your mobile device.  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will  
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of  
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health  
problems.  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.  
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds  
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio  
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some  
researchers have reported biological changes associated  
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.  
The majority of studies published have failed to show an  
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell  
phone and health problems.  
Although GALAXY is not a cell phone, it can operate on the  
same network as cell phones and can use the same Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals to communicate with the network as  
a cell phone. Therefore, although the following information  
refers specifically to RF exposure from wireless phones, it  
may apply similarly to GALAXY when it is being used on a cell  
phone network.  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication  
includes the following information:  
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at  
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by  
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects  
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health  
effects.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not  
be confused with the effects from other types of  
electromagnetic energy.  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection  
between RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In  
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies  
that have shown a connection have failed.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found  
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.  
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away  
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the  
genetic material.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones  
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community  
has supported additional research to address gaps in  
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to  
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and  
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal  
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for  
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and  
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.  
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.  
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.  
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,  
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic  
radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little  
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused  
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk  
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the  
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour  
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors  
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions  
being drawn from this data. Additional information about  
Interphone can be found at  
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio  
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence  
(MOBI-KIDS)  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the  
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy  
from communication technologies including cell phones and  
brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-  
center study involving 14 European and non-European  
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be  
found at  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did  
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional  
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA  
continues to monitor developments in this field.  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users  
(COSMOS)  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health  
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there  
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio  
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study  
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in  
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the  
COSMOS study can be found at  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)  
Program of the National Cancer Institute  
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk  
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell  
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.  
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence  
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about  
SEER can be found at  
.
.
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA  
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry  
to take a number of steps, including the following:  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency  
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take  
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF  
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user; and  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
your head and the cell phone.  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting  
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non-  
Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure  
that safety standards continue to adequately protect the  
public.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets  
and various types of body-worn accessories such as  
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to  
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the  
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in  
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance  
requirements when used against the head and against the  
body.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
 
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for  
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in  
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head  
from RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories which claim to shield the head from those  
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield  
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while  
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory  
attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these  
products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike  
“hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere  
with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced  
to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in  
RF absorption.  
Children and Cell Phones  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users  
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and  
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure  
apply to children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
the head and the cell phone.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones  
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United  
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.  
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no  
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors  
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone  
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based  
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from  
various sources can be obtained from the following  
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information  
Your wireless mobile device is a radio transmitter and  
receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the  
exposure limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S.  
Government.  
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)  
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed  
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the  
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF  
energy.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
US Food and Drug Administration:  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile  
devices employs a unit of measurement known as the  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body  
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC  
requires wireless devices to comply with a safety limit of 1.6  
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
   
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety  
to give additional protection to the public and to account for  
any variations in measurements.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with  
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an  
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all  
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC  
RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR value for this  
model device as reported to the FCC is:  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the mobile device transmitting at  
its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.  
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified  
power level, the actual SAR level of the mobile device while  
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.  
This is because the mobile device is designed to operate at  
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to  
reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a  
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output of  
the mobile device.  
Body: 1.55 W/kg.  
FCC Radio Frequency Emission  
This device meets the FCC Radio Frequency Emission  
Guidelines.  
FCC ID: A3LSGHI497  
More information on the device's SAR can be found from the  
following FCC website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/  
.
SAR information on this and other model mobile devices can  
be accessed online on the FCC's website through http://  
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model mobile device, this site uses  
the mobile device FCC ID number, which is usually printed  
somewhere on the case of the mobile device.  
Before a new model mobile device is available for sale to the  
public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does  
not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for  
each model mobile device are performed in positions and  
locations (e.g. near the body) as required by the FCC.  
For typical operations, this mobile device has been tested  
and meets FCC SAR guidelines.  
Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular mobile  
device, follow the instructions on the website and it should  
provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular  
mobile device. Additional SAR information can also be  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
obtained at  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more  
of the following measures:  
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-  
cellular-telephones.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
FCC Part 15 Information to User  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned  
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
On the Road - Off the Tablet  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe  
operation of his or her vehicle.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task  
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,  
drinking, talking to passengers, or using a mobile device -  
unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is  
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their  
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while  
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your  
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that  
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
     
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible  
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand  
and address distractions.  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in  
an automobile:  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in  
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in  
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could  
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices  
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always  
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or  
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use  
may be permitted in certain areas.  
Before using your device to chat with friends, consider your  
circumstances. Let the chat wait when driving conditions  
require. Remember, driving comes first, nothing else!  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver’s clear view of the street and traffic.  
If you consider a chat necessary and appropriate, follow  
these tips:  
Never use wireless data services such as Web browsing or  
e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
Use a hands-free device;  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video  
games while operating a vehicle.  
Secure your mobile device within easy reach;  
Chat when you are not moving;  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
Battery Use and Safety  
Plan chats when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are  
driving and will suspend the chat if necessary;  
Do not take notes or look up information while driving;  
The battery in GALAXY is not intended to be replaced by the  
consumer. If you believe the battery is damaged or needs to  
be replaced, take the GALAXY to a service center for  
inspection and replacement.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Do not let the GALAXY or battery come in contact with  
liquids. Liquids can get into the GALAXY’s circuits, leading to  
corrosion. Even when the GALAXY appears to be dry and appears  
to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a  
safety hazard. If the GALAXY and/or battery get wet, have them  
checked by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if  
they appear to be working properly.  
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and  
recharge your battery only with  
Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your GALAXY.  
WARNING!  
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the GALAXY  
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or  
chargers.  
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the GALAXY or the battery and could cause  
the GALAXY or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp  
battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave  
oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your GALAXY in  
your car in high temperatures.  
.
Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Some  
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable  
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even  
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase  
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories.  
If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is  
compatible, contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
Misuse or use of incompatible batteries and charging  
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a  
possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious  
Do not dispose of the GALAXY or the battery in a fire. The  
GALAXY or the battery may explode when overheated.  
Avoid dropping the GALAXY. Dropping the GALAXY, especially on  
a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the GALAXY. If  
you suspect damage to the GALAXY or battery, take it to a service  
center for inspection.  
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.  
injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious hazard  
.
Health and Safety Information 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not  
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.  
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
For more information about recycling your GALAXY, go to:  
1-800-822-8837 for more information.  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR  
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE  
POWER OUTLET.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to:  
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect or call 1-877-278-0799.  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE  
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may  
explode.  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this mobile device has met applicable  
UL safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety  
instructions per UL guidelines:  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Display / Touch-Screen  
GPS  
Please note the following information when using your  
mobile device:  
GALAXY can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for  
location-based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled  
by the U.S. Government that are subject to changes  
implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense  
policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).  
Changes may affect the performance of location-based  
technology on your mobile device.  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is  
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use  
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause  
injury to you.  
Your Location  
Location-based information includes information that can be  
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile  
device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless  
network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if  
you use applications that require location-based information  
(e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit  
location-based information. The location-based information  
may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless  
service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other  
third-parties providing services.  
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A  
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,  
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a  
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when  
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For  
more information, please refer to the “Standard  
Limited Warranty”.  
Navigation  
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data  
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or  
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
       
time. In some areas, complete information may not be  
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may  
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs  
Emergency Communication  
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic  
circuits.  
.
If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate  
drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer,  
because this may damage the mobile device and could  
cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device  
with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to  
you or damage to the mobile device.  
GALAXY should not be relied upon for essential  
communications (medical emergencies, calls to 911, or  
communications to emergency services). GALAXY is not  
designed or intended to be used for such communications.  
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) services which may be  
used on GALAXY to make phone calls do not support 911  
calls and are only intended for talking with friends.  
Extreme heat or cold  
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /  
113°F.  
Care and Maintenance  
Microwaves  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty  
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many  
years:  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Dust and Dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water  
solution.  
permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use  
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth®  
or other wireless devices).  
Shock or vibration  
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in  
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential  
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound  
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the  
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting  
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of  
sound, settings, and equipment.  
Paint  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the  
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent  
proper operation.  
Responsible Listening  
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
You should follow some common sense recommendations  
when using any portable audio device:  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as  
sound is played louder and for longer durations.  
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into  
an audio source.  
Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the  
most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some  
scientific research suggests that using portable audio  
devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at  
high volume settings for long durations may lead to  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,  
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your  
hearing.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
   
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
American Academy of Audiology  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,  
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music  
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Internet:  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less  
time is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
Internet:  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic  
Devices  
National Institute for Occupational Safety  
and Health (NIOSH)  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic  
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from  
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH  
(1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
Implantable Medical Devices  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an  
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the device.  
Internet:  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/  
default.html  
Persons who have such devices:  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches  
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is  
turned ON;  
Operating Environment  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any  
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or  
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory  
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any  
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
   
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of  
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about  
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical  
device, consult your health care provider.  
Posted Facilities  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted  
notices require you to do so.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and  
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion  
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are  
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling  
point (service station).  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
.
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able  
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your  
mobile device off in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment  
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the  
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and  
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting  
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They  
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals  
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any  
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off  
your vehicle engine.  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with  
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle  
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that  
has been added to your vehicle.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When your Device is Wet  
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy  
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection  
Association.  
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is  
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately, if  
applicable (if the device will not turn off or you cannot  
remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with  
a towel and take it to a service center.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not  
expressly approved in this document could void your  
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,  
antennas, and chargers.  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,  
damage the mobile device, or use services that increase your  
mobile device bill.  
The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous  
and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories  
cause damage or a defect to the mobile device. Although  
your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of  
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting,  
bending, or sitting on it.  
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out  
of the reach of small children.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
Other Important Safety Information  
FCC Notice  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device. Faulty  
service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty  
applicable to the device.  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used  
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can  
require you to stop using the mobile device if such  
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment used in your  
vehicle are securely mounted.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
           
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension  
or denial of network services to the offender, or legal action, or  
both.  
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can  
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical  
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the  
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or  
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static  
electricity before inserting the headset.  
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do  
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.  
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing  
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended  
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device  
immediately.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive  
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its  
parts, or accessories.  
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively  
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a  
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may  
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,  
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended  
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,  
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort  
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.  
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or  
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed  
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could  
result.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use  
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be  
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate  
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on  
an aircraft.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 11: Warranty Information  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage  
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal  
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,  
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents  
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;  
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use  
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;  
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC  
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG's devices and  
accessories ("Products") are free from defects in material  
and workmanship under normal use and service for the  
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first  
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following  
specified period of time after that date:  
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,  
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;  
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as  
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,  
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;  
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception  
Tablet  
1 Year  
1 Year  
Batteries (Including  
Internal Batteries)  
Case  
90 Days  
Other Tablet Accessories 1 Year  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of  
Product by Purchaser.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
       
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems  
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased  
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers  
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does  
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a  
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG Tablet for  
which it is specified.  
equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on  
the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is  
longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. This  
Limited Warranty is extended to the Purchaser and is not  
transferable or assignable to any other person or entity.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser  
must return the Product to an authorized Tablet service  
facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied  
by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the  
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product  
and the seller's name and address.  
What are SAMSUNG's obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product  
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited  
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product,  
without charge to Purchaser, or at SAMSUNG's sole option,  
refund the purchase price.  
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please  
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-800-SAMSUNG. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping,  
and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option, use rebuilt,  
reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing  
any Product, or may replace Product with a rebuilt,  
reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases will  
be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other  
repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a period  
Purchaser should keep a separate backup copy of any  
contents of the Product before delivering the Product to  
SAMSUNG for warranty service, as some or all of the  
contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of  
warranty service.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG's liability?  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO  
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE  
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH  
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,  
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR,  
OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG'S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN  
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR,  
WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT;  
LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY,  
GOODWILL, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE;  
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE  
DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG  
AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,  
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with  
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,  
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend  
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or  
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,  
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited  
Warranty.  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are  
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you  
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness  
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant  
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs  
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad  
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no  
more than half of the total administrative, facility and  
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and  
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not  
be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any  
other person's or entity's Product or claim, and specifically,  
without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any  
circumstances proceed as part of a class action.  
The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator,  
whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief  
allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be  
conducted according to the American Arbitration Association  
(AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer  
disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the  
Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas,  
without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall  
govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or  
performance.  
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the  
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will  
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Severability  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by  
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days  
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the  
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall  
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited  
Warranty.  
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration  
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name  
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;  
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;  
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found  
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product  
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the  
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using  
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed  
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to  
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File  
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and  
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the  
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
software, owned by Samsung Electronics Co. and its  
affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and  
licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which includes  
computer software and may include associated media,  
printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation  
("Software"). Samsung Electronics Co. is a separate company  
from the company that provides the limited warranty for this  
mobile device, Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC.  
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in  
order to provide this service at no charge. If the  
warranty has expired on the device, charges may  
apply.  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its  
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED  
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU  
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR  
THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, RETURN THE DEVICE TO THE  
RETAILER FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT.  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights  
reserved.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung Electronics Co. grants you  
the following rights provided that you comply with all terms  
and conditions of this EULA: You may install, use, access,  
display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard  
disk(s) or other permanent storage media of one computer  
and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile  
device at a time, and you may not make the Software  
available over a network where it could be used by multiple  
computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the  
Software in machine readable form for backup purposes  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice. [111611]  
End User License Agreement for  
Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you  
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung Electronics Co.") for  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
only; provided that the backup copy must include all  
copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the  
original.  
Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliates may use this  
information solely to improve their products or to provide  
customized services or technologies to you and will not  
disclose this information in a form that personally identifies  
you.  
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
Electronics Co. reserves all rights not expressly granted to  
you in this EULA. The Software is protected by copyright and  
other intellectual property laws and treaties. Samsung  
Electronics Co. or its suppliers own the title, copyright and  
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The  
Software is licensed, not sold.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements  
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that  
Samsung Electronics Co. may provide to you or make  
available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of  
the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such  
upgrade. To use Software identified as an upgrade, you must  
first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung  
Electronics Co. as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading,  
you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for  
your upgrade eligibility.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software  
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly  
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),  
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create  
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,  
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting  
services with the Software.  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component  
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this  
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung  
Electronics Co. and its affiliates may collect and use  
technical information gathered as part of the product support  
services related to the Software provided to you, if any.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a  
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the  
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.  
LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL  
WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.  
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end  
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other  
governments.  
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK  
OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF  
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS.  
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR  
LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO  
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,  
OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR  
ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS  
DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OF WARRANTY  
REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY  
OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung Electronics Co. if you fail to comply  
with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon  
termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of the  
Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the  
Software.  
10. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party  
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this  
mobile device. Samsung Electronics Co. makes no  
representations whatsoever about any of these applications.  
Since Samsung Electronics Co. has no control over such  
applications, you acknowledge and agree that Samsung  
Electronics Co. is not responsible for the availability of such  
9. Disclaimer of Warranty. ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE IS  
PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS,  
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE  
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
applications and is not responsible or liable for any content,  
advertising, products, services, or other materials on or  
available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge  
and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole  
risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality,  
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy  
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF  
INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up to you  
to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use  
is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and  
other items of a destructive nature. References on this  
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,  
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,  
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its  
products and services. You agree that Samsung Electronics  
Co. shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for  
any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by, or in  
connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party  
content, products, or services available on or through any  
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of  
any third-party application is governed by such third party  
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,  
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any  
11. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party  
Applications. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT  
WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING  
THE AVAILABILITY, USE, TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY,  
ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE  
USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY  
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT  
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., IS  
DOWNLOADED, OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT YOUR OWN  
DISCRETION AND RISK AND YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGE TO THE MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA  
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING  
WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY  
ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO  
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY  
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly  
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE  
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS,  
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE  
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE  
LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL  
WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,  
LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO  
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,  
OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR  
ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY SHALL BE DEEMED TO  
ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY BY  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR  
12. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WILL  
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING  
OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS  
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,  
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN  
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE  
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,  
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO  
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS  
OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK  
OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF  
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS.  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST  
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN  
THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET YOUR  
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY  
APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR  
THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE  
CORRECTED. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL  
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG  
14. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This  
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on  
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application  
of which is expressly excluded.  
ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL  
LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR  
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE  
OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR  
ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED  
THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS  
MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION  
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE  
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS  
(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, 11 AND 12) SHALL APPLY TO  
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,  
EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
15. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.  
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or  
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved  
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the  
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board.  
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the  
parties.  
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO. ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR  
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED  
13. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The  
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as  
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"  
and "commercial software documentation" with only those  
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the  
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only  
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted  
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions  
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to  
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not  
be combined or consolidated with any other person's or  
entity's claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation  
of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed  
as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted  
before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in  
form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
arbitration shall be conducted according to the American  
Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules  
applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is  
entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of  
the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws  
principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the EULA. For  
any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive  
of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or  
less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award  
your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs  
as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung Electronics  
Co. its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is  
determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a  
Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than  
half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or  
$50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and Samsung  
Electronics Co. shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
Samsung Electronics Co.'s employees, representatives and  
affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of  
the Software. You may opt out of this dispute resolution  
procedure by providing notice to Samsung Electronics Co. no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first  
consumer purchaser's purchase of this device. To opt out,  
you must send notice by e-mail to  
[email protected], with the subject line: "Arbitration  
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your  
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was  
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and  
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you  
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on  
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which  
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of  
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;  
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not  
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-  
987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim")  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and  
providing the same information. These are the only two  
forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute  
resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution  
procedure will not affect your use of the device or its  
preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the  
benefits of this license.  
16. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co.  
relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or  
contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals  
and representations with respect to the Software or any other  
subject matter covered by this EULA. If any provision of this  
EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the  
other provisions shall continue in full force and effect.  
[101212]  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237  
Section 12: Samsung Product Registration  
Sign Up Now  
Customize your Samsung device experience  
• Activate product warranty  
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account  
• No monthly fees  
Get More  
• Latest info on promotions, events and special offers on related products  
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion  
• Great deals on downloads  
Register now at  
www.samsung.com/register  
Scan this code to go  
directly to the registration page.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Children and Cell Phones 210  
Contacts  
creating 54  
display options 56  
exporting and importing 59  
groups 60  
joining 58  
linking 58  
namecards 59  
separating joined 59  
setting a photo as contact  
icon 102  
starred contacts 62  
updating 55  
Numerics  
3.5mm Headset Jack 20  
A
Accounts  
setting up 53  
Adobe PDF 163  
Alarm  
Turning Off 134  
AllShare  
configuring 135  
Android keyboard  
configuring 45  
App Shortcuts 35  
Application Bar 25  
Application Manager settings  
downloaded apps 186  
running services 187  
Applications 38  
downloading new 161  
Smart Remote 43  
AT&T FamilyMap 138  
AT&T Navigator 139  
B
Back button 24  
Battery  
charging 6  
indicator 6  
installing and removing 6  
Battery Use & Safety 214  
Bluetooth  
pairing with a device 126  
settings 175  
turning on or off 126  
Browser 114  
Quick Controls 122  
Browser Settings 119  
C
Camcorder  
recording video 108  
settings 109  
D
Display / Touch-Screen 217  
Display settings  
auto-rotate screen 182  
brightness 181  
Camera  
settings 105  
font style 182  
timeout 182  
taking photos 105  
Care and Maintenance 218  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DivX®  
registration code 205  
Do cell phones pose a health  
hazard? 206  
Downloads  
managing 129  
Gmail  
account settings 75  
composing and sending 74  
refreshing your account 73  
setting up your account 72  
Google  
Gmail 72  
Maps 149  
Navigation 156  
Play Store 161  
Search 164  
your account 10  
YouTube 170  
Google Messenger 81  
Google Play 161  
Google Voice Typing 52  
GPS 217  
GPS Applications 132  
Groups  
H
Handwriting 50  
Health and Safety Information 206  
Home button 24  
Home screen 21  
adding widgets 31  
folders 35  
primary shortcuts 31  
wallpaper 36  
E
Email  
Combined view 66  
composing and sending 67  
configuring accounts 64  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals 206  
I
Infrared Blaster 20  
K
Kies 124  
F
via Wi-Fi 179  
FCC Notice and Cautions 223  
Firmware Update 124  
L
Language and Input settings  
select language 195  
G
Gallery 100  
Latitude Settings 151  
Location Services Settings 190  
Locking and Unlocking  
unlocking the keypad 16  
sharing photos and video 104  
viewing photos and video 101  
creating 60  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Navigation 24  
Primary Shortcuts 31  
screen 25  
Navigation button 24  
Navigator 139  
Nearby Devices  
settings 180  
status 30  
Notification Panel 26  
Notifications 26  
Photos  
Gallery 100  
sharing 104  
taking 105  
Play Music app 90  
Play Store 161  
M
Maps 149  
Memory Card  
formatting 131  
installing 14  
removing 15  
Menu  
Playlists  
adding songs 95  
creating 85, 95  
Polaris® Office 163  
Powering On and Off 9  
Predictive Text 196  
Privacy settings  
factory data reset 199  
context-sensitive 25  
Messages  
email 64  
Gmail 72  
types 64  
O
Operating Environment 221  
Other Important Safety  
Information 223  
Messages app 80  
Messenger 81  
Mini App Tray 22, 37  
Music  
add songs to a playlist 95  
creating a playlist 85, 95  
myAT&T 137  
Q
P
Pairing with Bluetooth 126  
Peel 43  
Quick Controls 122  
R
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 209  
Remote  
Set up 165  
Photo Editor 111, 157  
N
Namecards  
Photo ID  
setting 102  
sending 59  
Smart 165  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reset  
factory data 199  
Responsible Listening 219  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 223  
S
Samsung Account  
signing in 189  
Samsung Keyboard  
entering text 45  
Samsung Kies 124  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling 216  
Screen Capture 136  
Securing your device  
locking and unlocking 15  
Security  
locking and unlocking 15  
locking your device 16  
Security settings  
device administration 194  
passwords 193  
Settings 173  
T
allow mock locations 203  
developer options 203  
Location Services 190  
USB debugging 203  
Shortcuts 35  
SIM card  
installation 8  
Installing 8  
SIM Cart Port 20  
Smart Practices While Driving 213  
Smart Remote  
see Peel 165  
Snooze 134  
Software Update 205  
Sound settings  
general 180  
T9 Trace 49, 197  
Text  
changing input method 44  
entering 44  
input methods 44  
Turning Your Device On and Off 9  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 216  
Update Available 132  
USB connections  
as a mass storage device 130  
USB debugging 203  
USB settings  
as a mass storage device 130  
mass storage device 130  
Windows Media Player 130  
V
Videos  
notifications 181  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information 211  
Standard Limited Warranty 225  
Status Bar 29  
Synchronizing account  
auto-sync 188  
Gallery 100  
recording 108  
sharing 104  
trusted credentials 194  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WiFi (see Wi-Fi) 122  
Wi-Fi Direct 30, 125  
Windows Media Player  
synchronizing with 130  
Wireless Networking  
Bluetooth 126  
W
Warranty Information 225  
Widgets 31  
Wi-Fi  
adding a connection  
manually 123  
Direct 59  
Direct settings 177  
enabling 147  
X
XT9 Predictive Text 196  
Y
Yellowpages 171  
YouTube 170  
YPmobile (Yellow Pages) 171  
Wi-Fi 122  
World Clock 167  
Z
Zinio 172  
scanning and connecting 123  
settings 173  
turning on or off 123, 173  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radio Shack Portable Speaker 40 1437 User Guide
RCA VCR VR609HF User Guide
Reliance Water Heaters Water Heater 184123 000 User Guide
ResMed Humidifier III III ST User Guide
Ricoh Camera Flash GF 1 User Guide
Roland Stereo Amplifier MOBILE CUBE User Guide
Samsung CD Player SGH i607 User Guide
Samsung Computer Drive HM120GI User Guide
Samsung Stereo System AH68 00935B User Guide
Seagate Camcorder ST3146807FC User Guide